Manual Panasonic DMREX96CEG (page 2 of 88) (English)

569364

Zoom out

Zoom in

1/88

until

2013/4/4

Thank you for purchasing this product.

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product, and save this manual for future use.

Operating Instructions

DVD Recorder

Model No. DMR-EX96C

∫ Notice for DVB functions

≥DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.

≥This DVD recorder is equipped with a Common Interface. It can receive encrypted

digital broadcast services.

≥The tuner in this unit is compatible with digital broadcast (digital CATV broadcast or

digital terrestrial broadcast) and analogue broadcast services.

In these operating instructions,

[DVB-C] : indicates features applicable to digital CATV broadcasts (DVB-C).

[DVB-T] : indicates features applicable to digital terrestrial broadcasts (DVB-T).

[Analogue] : indicates features applicable to analogue broadcasts.

About descriptions in these

operating instructions

≥Pages to be referred to are

indicated as “> ±±”.

∫ TV Guide Types

TV Guide is displayed with the provided data from broadcast stations.

For digital terrestrial broadcasts (DVB-T) or Analogue broadcasts:

The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in Germany. (as of January 2013)

≥This service may not be available in some areas in the above countries.

≥There may be changes in the service areas.

Region number supported by this unit

Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according to where they

are sold.

≥The region number of this unit is “2”.

≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.

Example:

2 ALL

Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com

VQT4W64

Quick Start

Guide

Basic

operations

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 1 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

∫ Unit

≥To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,

– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing.

– Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on this

unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

– Do not remove covers.

– Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to qualified

service personnel.

– Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

– Do not place heavy items on this unit.

∫ AC mains lead

≥To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,

– Ensure that the power supply voltage corresponds to the voltage

printed on this unit.

– Insert the mains plug fully into the socket outlet.

– Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.

– Do not handle the plug with wet hands.

– Hold onto the mains plug body when disconnecting the plug.

– Do not use a damaged mains plug or socket outlet.

≥The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this unit so that

the mains plug can be unplugged from the socket outlet

immediately.

∫ Unit

≥ This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those specified herein may

result in hazardous radiation exposure.

≥ Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted candles, on

this unit.

≥ This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference occurs, please

increase separation between this unit and the mobile telephone.

≥ This unit is intended for use in moderate climates.

∫ Placement

≥ Place this unit on an even surface.

≥ To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,

– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in cabinet or

in another confined space. Ensure this unit is well ventilated.

– Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with newspapers,

tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

– Do not expose this unit to direct sunlight, high temperatures,

high humidity, and excessive vibration.

∫ Batteries

≥ Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only

with the type recommended by the manufacturer.

≥ Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and may

cause a fire.

– Do not mix old and new batteries or different types at the same

time.

– Do not heat or expose to flame.

– Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct sunlight

for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.

– Do not take apart or short circuit.

– Do not recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.

– Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.

– Remove batteries if you do not intend to use the remote control

for a long period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.

≥ When disposing the batteries, please contact your local authorities

or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

∫ Batteries

Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.

≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.

≥Remote control operations (> 4)

∫ Use

The distance and angles are an approximate.

Safety precautions

WARNING

CAUTION

Getting started

CLASS 1

LASER PRODUCT

(Inside of product)

supplied accessories

Please check and identify the supplied accessories.

(Product numbers correct as of February 2013. These

may be subject to change.)

∏ 1 Remote control

(N2QAYB000471)

∏ 1 AC mains lead

For use with this unit only. Do not use

it with other equipment.

Also, do not use cords for other

equipment with this unit.

∏ 1 RF coaxial cable

∏ 2Batteries

for remote control

The remote control information

R6/LR6, AA

Remote control signal sensor

7 m directly in front of the unit

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 2 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Table of contents

Getting started

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

supplied accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Quick Start Guide

Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Easy access to various functions

— FUNCTION MENU Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

STEP 1

Insert the CAM (Conditional Access Module) and

Smart Card

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

STEP 2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus

(Common Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

USB memory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Regarding Music files and still pictures

(JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Media handling (Disc/USB memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Basic operations

Watching Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Playing recorded video contents/

Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Recording television programmes [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Timer recording [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Advanced operations

Notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

General notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

For recording to discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times . . 23

When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . 23

When removing a recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Advanced recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Recording broadcasts/titles from external

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Recording from digital satellite receiver or video equipment

—

Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Linked timer recordings with external equipment

(digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Advanced timer recording [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Check, change or delete a programme, or resolve

overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 28

If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears . . . . . . . . 28

Language for digital broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle

(Digital broadcast only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Searching for the programme in the TV Guide list . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or

category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Using S

HOWVIEW number to make timer recordings

(Analogue broadcast only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Changing the Settings and Editing TV Guide for Analogue

broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

[DVB-T] Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

[DVB-T] Useful functions in GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play

—DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance . . . . . . . . . . . 34

To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

To edit the group of titles [HDD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

To play the title from the beginning [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

To play music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Playing Music files and still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . 36

Showing the menu screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Playing Music files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Playing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Start Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI

Control

”/Q Link). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Easy control only with VIERA remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Convenient functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

To pause the TV programme you are watching

—Pause Live TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Editing

Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Video) . . . . . . 44

Editing still pictures and music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Picture) . . . . . 48

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Copying

Copying titles or Playlists (Video). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Copying Video (MPEG2) from a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Copying still pictures/Playlist (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Copying new still pictures on the USB memory

—Copy New Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Copying still pictures on the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Copying music to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Copying music from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/

DVD-R DL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Setting menus

Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 60

HDD and disc management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Deleting all titles and Playlists (Video)—Delete all titles. . . . . . . 62

Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Deleting all the contents—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first

—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . 63

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

HOLD function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional Access Module) software

upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Reference

Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . . 73

Connecting a VCR with AUDIO/VIDEO terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Connecting a television and VCR, digital satellite receiver . . . . . 73

Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back Cover

Getting startedQuick Start

Guide

Basic

operations

Advanced

operations

EditingSetting menusReference Copying

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 3 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Control reference guide

Quick Start

Guide

Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.

1 Turn the unit on (> 8)

2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18)

Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].

3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers

4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still

pictures or music (> 21, 27, 47)

5 Basic operations for recording and play

[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching

(> 41)

6 Show digital channel information (> 17)/Programme information

within TV Guide screen (> 28)/Show status messages (> 61)

7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 33)

8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 34, 42)

9 Show OPTION menu (> 29, 42)

By using the OPTION button, you may access the various

functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.

: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 33)

; Colour buttons

– for TV Guide operations (> 28)

– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 34, 35, 37)

– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53)

– for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56)

– for deactivating timer programme (> 27)

– for showing the Series Information screen (> 32)

– for selecting character type when entering text (> 50)

– for tuning settings (> 65)

< Recording functions

≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)

≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)

≥[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment

(> 25)

≥[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 39)

= Show Teletext information (>

16)

> T

ransmit the remote control signal

? Television operations (> 72)

@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system

(> 16, 28)

A Show S

HOWVIEW screen (> 30)

B Input select (AV1, AV2 or AV3) (> 25, 26)

C Show Timer Recording screen (> 27)

D Exit the menu screen

E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20, 28)

F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 41)

By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main

functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.

G Return to previous screen

H Create chapter (> 33)

I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 33)

J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 33)

K Skip the specified time (> 33)

L Show on-screen menu (> 60)

Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle

etc.

M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast

programme has subtitles.) (> 16)

1 Disc indicator

2 Digital broadcast indicator

Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.

3 Copying indicator

4 USB port indicator

5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator

6 Timer recording indicator

7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator

8 Main display section indicator

9 Remote control visual feedback

This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.

: Recording/Playback indicator

Remote control

STTL

STATUS

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

PAUSE LIVE TV

SKIP

ShowView

PAGE

SELECT

INPUT



DRIVE

SELECT



VOL

DELETE

PROG/CHECK

EXIT

TIME SLIP

AUDIO

DISPLAY

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

REC

CHAPTER

-10s

MANUAL SKIP

+60s

OPTION

RETURN

ヵユヹヵ





























































The unit’s display

HDD

DVD

REC

PLAY

COPY

USB EXT

-L

 



PLAY

REC

Recording indicator Playback

indicator

Recording/Playback

indicator

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 4 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Quick Start

Guide

1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 8)

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In

standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of

power.

2 Disc tray (> 15)

3 USB port (> 15)

4 Display (> 4)

5 Open/Close disc tray (> 15)

6 Channel select (> 16)

7 Start recording (> 19)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 19)

8 Stop (> 18, 19, 33)

9 Start play (> 18)

: Remote control signal sensor (> 2)

; Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (> 26, 73)

Rear panel terminals (> 6, 7, 73, 74)

“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)

You can access the main function quickly and easily.

If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the unit on,

set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu (

68).

Main unit

 











Pull to flip down the front panel.

Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display

Video

Picture

Music

FUNCTION MENU

RETURN

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

View

Others

Drive Select

Remain

30:00 SP

HDD















Select a function.

Selectable items are

displayed on the right.

Select an item.

Press [OK].

1 Playback

Select when you wish to

playback the contents. The

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

or menu screen etc. will be

displayed.

Video (> 18, 34)

Picture (> 37)

Music (> 35, 36)

Top Menu (> 18)

Menu (> 18)

2 Recording

Select the recording method.

The TV Guide, Timer

Recording or ShowView

Record screen will be

displayed.

TV Guide (> 20, 28)

Timer Recording (> 20, 27)

ShowView Record (> 30)

3 Delete

Select the title or file type you

wish to delete. The DELETE

Navigator screen will be

displayed.

Video (> 21)

Picture (> 47)

Music (> 47)

4 Copy

Select the copy method.

Video (HDD to DVD) (> 52)

Advanced Copy (> 53)

Copy Music CD (> 58)

Copy Music (> 58)

5 View

Select to watch TV with the

tuner of this unit.

“View” is displayed in the

FUNCTION MENU when this

unit is connected with the TV

that supports “HDAVI Control

2” or later. (> 39)

6 Others

Select and execute a function

other than those above, such

as recording or setting.

Playlists (> 44, 48)

Flexible Rec (> 24)

HDD Management (> 61)

DVD Management (> 61)

Setup (> 64)

7 Drive Select

Change which drive is used.

HDD

DVD

USB

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 5 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

STEP 1

Insert the CAM (Conditional Access Module) and Smart Card

You need a Conditional Access Module together with a valid Smart Card and a subscription with the corresponding CATV provider if you want to

watch/record encrypted digital CATV broadcasts.

1 Insert the certified Smart Card into the commercially available CAM (Conditional Access Module).

2 Insert the CAM into the CI (Common Interface) slot of this unit.

TV service encryption is automatically cancelled and the service can be viewed or recorded.

≥When using unencrypted digital terrestrial broadcasts or analogue broadcasts, you do not need to insert CAM. Proceed to STEP 2. (> below)

The recording might be prohibited by broadcasters.

≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.

≥Refer to “Additional connections” (> 73, 74) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.

≥Be sure to insert the CAM horizontally into the slot.

≥Insert the CAM with the correct direction.

≥For more details, see the manual of the CAM and Smart

Card, or consult the dealer.

≥The Common Interface supports the modules according to

DVB Specification and CI Plus Specification.

≥Unplug the AC mains lead before you insert or remove the

CAM with Smart Card. Remove it slowly.

OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(

BITSTREAM

)

OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV1

(

)

OPTICAL

AV2

(

EXT

)

AC IN

COMMON INTERFACE

AC IN

CI (Common Interface)

slot

CAM (Conditional Access Module)

Smart Card

This unit’s rear panel

Note

STEP 2 Connection

Using a 21-pin Scart cable

≥You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 39).

≥You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (> 86).

“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 69)

When the unit is not to be used for a long time

To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off.

[approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save in Standby” is activated and “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)]

Connecting a television

Required setting

OPTICAL

OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV1

(

)

AV2

(

EXT

)

AC IN

COMMON INTERFACE

VHF/UHF

RF IN

To the terrestrial aerial

Television’s rear panel

Aerial cable/

CATV coaxial

cable

This unit’s rear panel

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

Fully wired 21-pin

Scart cable

AC mains lead

(supplied)

Connect only after all other connections are

complete.

“AV2 Input” setting in the Setup menu

(> 70)

Required setting

21-pin Scart

cable

Cooling fan

Connecting a terminal other than the

21-pin Scart terminal (> 7, 74)

RF coaxial cable

(supplied)

Connect the unit directly to the

television

If you connect the unit through an AV

selector or video cassette recorder to

the television, video signal will be

affected by copyright protection systems

and the picture may not be shown

correctly.

≥When connecting to a television

with a built-in VCR

Connect to the input terminals on the television side if

there are both television and VCR input terminals.

Television

VCR

This unit

DO NOT

Common Interface (CI) slot

In order to view or record encrypted CATV services,

you must insert a certified CAM and Smart Card

into this slot. (> above)

Cable

Digital satellite

receiver’s rear panel

For viewing digital satellite broadcasts,

connect this unit with a digital satellite

receiver before connecting the AC

mains lead.

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 6 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Quick Start

Guide

You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable connection between this unit and your TV.

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital

video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to

1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,

native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

≥Use the High Speed HDMI cables. Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized. It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 85) and

output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)

≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input

terminal (PC monitors, etc.):

Depending on the unit, images may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be

output.)

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

” function

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.

[> 39, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

”/Q Link)]

≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.

≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver

OUTOUT

OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV1

(

)

AV2

(

EXT

)

COMMON INTERFACE

COMMON INTERFACECOMMON INTERFACE

HDMI IN

HDMI AV OUT

OPTICAL

Fully wired

21-pin Scart cable

This unit’s rear panel

HDMI cable

Television’s rear

panel

Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)

If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following

functions are available.

≥Direct TV Recording (> 39)

≥Watching pictures from digital satellite receiver

(In this case, make sure to switch the television

input to “AV”.)

≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical”

(> 69).

(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)

Required setting

Digital satellite receiver's rear

panel

OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV1

(

)

AV2

(

EXT

)

COMMON INTERFACE

OPTICAL

HDMI AV OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

This unit’s rear panel

HDMI cable

Fully wired

21-pin Scart cable

Television’s rear panel

Receiver’s rear panel

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 7 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings

1 Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the

connections to this unit.

2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.

≥If the Language setting menu appears on the television,

press [3, 4] to select the language and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the

broadcasting systems and press [OK].

1 Digital Cable (DVB-C) & Analogue Channels:

Performs the digital CATV broadcasting and analogue

broadcasting Auto-Setup.

2 Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) & Analogue Channels:

Performs the digital terrestrial broadcasting and analogue

broadcasting Auto-Setup.

3 Digital Cable (DVB-C) Channels:

Performs the digital CATV broadcasting Auto Setup only.

4 Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) Channels:

Performs the digital terrestrial broadcasting Auto Setup

only.

4 Scan and set up broadcasting

channels.

Press [3, 4] to select “Quick Scan” or “Full Scan” and

press [OK].

“DVB Auto Setup” starts.

≥“Quick Scan” searches according to NIT (Network

Information Table) of CATV operators.

This takes about 5 minutes.

If no digital channels are found by “Quick Scan”, “Full Scan”

starts continuously.

≥“Full Scan” searches all range of the frequency.

This takes about 20 minutes.

When selecting 1, analogue broadcasting “Auto Setup” is

executed after “DVB Auto Setup” is completed.

Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].

When using indoor antenna that is not equipped with power

supply, select “On”.

“DVB Auto Setup” starts.

The unit will search for the terrestrial digital channels. TV

channels will be located and stored ready for use.

This takes 5-10 minutes.

When selecting 2, analogue broadcasting “Auto Setup” is

executed after “DVB Auto Setup” is completed.

5 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or

“On Timer” and press [OK] when the

“Power Save in Standby” setting

menu appears.

The features of the Power Save in Standby function when

the unit is in standby mode are as below.

§1

“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.

(

68)

§2

It is possible to startup and start recording within several

seconds.

– Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it

may take time to display the screen.

§3

When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the

Setup menu (

71)

If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the

television.

Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].

≥16:9:

When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television

≥Pan & Scan:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,

side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture

(> 85).

≥Letterbox:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.

16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style

(> 85).

When television picture appears, setup is complete.

Digital CATV broadcasting Auto Setup

(Selecting 1 or 3 on step 3)

MANUAL SKIP

STOP

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

INPUT

SELECT

PAGE

SLOW/SEARCH

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT



STATUS

EXIT

OPTION

RETURN

DELETE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PAUSE LIVE TV

SKIP



,,,

RETURN

FUNCTION

Numbered

buttons

Auto Setup

Digital Cable (DVB-C) & Analogue Channels

Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) & Analogue Channels

Digital Cable (DVB-C) Channels

Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) Channels

DVB Auto Setup

Quick Scan

Full Scan

DVB Auto Setup

Progress 0% 100%

No.

Quality

Channel Name Type

Das Erste

ZDF

Data

Digital terrestrial broadcasting Auto Setup

(Selecting 2 or 4 on step 3)

On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode

when the unit is in standby mode.

Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.

(Quick Start mode)

On Timer:

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time

and then press [OK].

≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during

the setting time period.

Power Save in Standby Activated (

On Timer

)

§1

Deactivated

(

Off

)

Power consumption

Approx. 0.3 W

§3

Approx. 13 W

Startup time Not Quick

Quick

§2

Watching the picture

(e.g. Digital satellite TV)

from the device

connected to AV2

Cannot do Can do

Active Antenna

Please check whether your

indoor antenna has its own

power supply or needs

a power supply by the DVD

Off

DVB Auto Setup

Scan CH 5 69

Quality

Channel Name Type

ABC

ABC 2

Data

Power Save in Standby

Power Save On

:00

From

:00

Saves standby power consumption

b di bli Q i k S f i d

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 8 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Quick Start

Guide

If the confirmation screen of GUIDE Plus+ data download

appears, perform the following steps.

(For information about GUIDE Plus+ system > 10)

6 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

7 Press the numbered buttons or

[3, 4, 2, 1] to enter your postal

code and press [OK].

GUIDE Plus+ data download starts. This takes about

30 minutes.

8 When the download has finished

Press [OK].

Set up is complete.

To stop partway

Press [RETURN ].

≥When you turn the unit on after inserting the CAM and Smart Card,

depending on the card provider, a PIN code or parental control

code may be demanded. (> 10)

TV Guide system provides programme information from the

broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV programme

magazine.

This unit can receive either of the TV Guides for the digital or

analogue broadcasts. After the Auto Setup (> 8) has completed, it is

set to receive the TV Guide for the digital broadcasts. It is required to

change the settings to use the TV Guide for the analogue

broadcasts. (> right)

[DVB-T] [Analogue]

You can use the GUIDE Plus+ system for TV Guide. (> 10, 31)

≥TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.

≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (> 69), the TV Guide

system cannot be used.

≥If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data

are not updated.

≥

The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the

aerial input of this unit. It is not possible to receive the data via the

externally connected digital satellite receiver or digital set-top boxes.

≥It is possible to record analogue broadcasts using Manual

recording, even without changing the TV Guide Type, and vice

versa. (> 27, 30)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and

press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [1].

5 Press [3, 4] to select “TV Guide

Type” and press [OK].

6 Press [3, 4] to select “Analogue

Channels” and press [OK].

7 Press [3, 4] to select the country and

press [OK].

8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

≥It will go into Standby status once, and the power will be

turned on again automatically. This procedure may take a

few minutes.

≥All of the TV Guide data for digital broadcasts and timer

recording settings will be erased.

9 After the power is turned on,

Download the GUIDE Plus+ data

following the instructions on the

screen.

≥It may take up to 2 hours to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system.

≥If the “Postal Code” screen is displayed, press

[3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to enter the postal

code.

10 Confirm the message on the screen.

≥If “No Data” appears (> 31, Editing TV Guide, Reference)

≥If “No Host channel detected.” appears (> 31, Changing the

settings, Host Channel)

≥If “Data download was unsuccessful.” appears (> 31,

Changing the settings, Data Download)

To stop partway

Press [RETURN ].

∫ If the clock setting menu appears

Set the clock manually (> 70).

∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned

correctly (> 65)

∫ To restart set up (> 64)

∫ Settings of the TV Guide for Analogue

broadcasts (> right)

TV Guide system

Post Code

Current Country : Germany

This unit downloads GUIDE Plus+ data

several times a day.

CHANGE

Note

Settings of the TV Guide for Analogue

broadcasts

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 9 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings

≥[DVB-C] GUIDE Plus+ system is not available (> below)

≥[DVB-T] GUIDE Plus+ system may not be available in some areas.

When GUIDE Plus+ system is available:

– Download automatically in standby mode

– Download manually from “GUIDE Plus+ Data Download Now” in

the Setup menu (> 71).

When GUIDE Plus+ system is not available:

– Download automatically while the unit is on.

– Download automatically in standby mode

if “TV Guide

Download in Standby” is set to “On” in the Setup menu (> 71)

To select the time to download in standby mode (> 71, TV

Guide/Software search period)

The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the

television station transmitting the television programme list) several

times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every day.

– Download automatically when the unit is turned off.

≥If you turn on the unit while “GUIDE” appears, the data update

is interrupted.

≥If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a timer

recording overlap, you can select which will be given priority.

(> 31, Night Download)

– Download manually from “Data Download” in the Setup menu.

(> 31)

≥Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately

one day before you can display the television programme list.

≥A station that is not registered in your area is not displayed in the

television programme list even if a signal can be received.

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead during data download.

≥During data download, the HDD rotates and will make operating

sounds.

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and

press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”

and press [1].

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Common

Interface” and press [OK].

The features that appear on the screen are dependent on the

contents of the inserted CAM and Smart Card.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

≥On-screen operation guide may not correspond to the

remote control buttons.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

≥For more information about TV service, please contact your

service provider.

∫ PIN code query

When you turn the unit on after inserting the card, depending on the

card provider, a PIN code or parental control code may be

demanded.

1 Enter the 4-digit code with the numbered buttons.

Delete an incorrect number with [DELETE ¢].

2 Confirm your password with [OK].

≥Other settings on the card, e.g. changing the password, can be

adjusted in the Setup menu. (> 70)

≥Do not set any limitations about parental controls in “Common

Interface” or recording/viewing programmes may not be possible.

Set the parental ratings level using “Child Lock” function. (> 66)

≥Depending on the card, in some cases its use together with this

unit may be limited or not possible.

TV Guide data download

Digital broadcasts

For GUIDE Plus+ system

Visit the following homepage for more information.

http://www.rovicorp.com

Analogue broadcasts

Note

STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus (Common Interface)

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

CHAPTER

REC

-10s

MANUAL SKIP

+60s

STOP

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

INPUT

SELECT

PAGE

SLOW/SEARCH

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT



STATUS

EXIT

OPTION

RETURN

DELETE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PAUSE LIVE TV

SKIP

DELETE

,,,

PAUSE

EXIT

FUNCTION MENU

RETURN



AUDIO

DELETE

Numbered

buttons

Setup

TV Aspect

Active Antenna

HDMI Settings

AV1 Output

AV2 Settnigs

16:9

Off

Video

TV System

PAL

Disc

Picture

Sound

Display

Tuning

Others

RETURN

TAB

SELECT

Common Interface

Connection

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 10 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Quick Start

Guide

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care

The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device

that is easily susceptible to damage.

As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.

∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust

Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be

possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.

∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device

The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or

copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.

∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD

If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this

condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all

content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

∫ HDD recording time remaining

This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which

may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.

If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a Playlist

(Video) will not increase the amount of time.)

The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the

environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.

Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.

To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.

≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the

instructions that came with the cloth.

Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and

viewing with pleasure.

Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it

impossible to record or play discs.

Use the Lens cleaner (optional) to clean the unit’s lens.

Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.

∫ Setup precautions

≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan

and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.

≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to

vibration or impact.

≥Do not place on anything that

generates heat like a video cassette

recorder, etc.

≥Do not place in an area often subject to

temperature changes.

≥Place in an area where condensation

does not occur. Condensation is a

phenomenon where moisture forms on a

cold surface when there is an extreme

change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal

damage to the unit.

≥Conditions where condensation may occur

– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from

a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or

when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly

impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is

subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of

the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.

– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.

– During the rainy season.

In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit

adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until

condensation is gone.

∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or

breakdown

The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,

etc. gets inside the unit.

∫ While operating

≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD

may become damaged.)

≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket, or flip the power breaker switch.

While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or

movement due to rotation is normal.

∫ When moving the unit

1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)

2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.

3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.

2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.

(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for

a short time.)

∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content

Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or

edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a

case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).

Unit care

This unit

VCR

DO NOT

Lens cleaner: RP-CL720AE

≥This lens cleaner may not be available for sale in all countries,

e.g. not available in Germany, please consult your Panasonic

dealer for advice.

Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.

Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the

unit.

Do not place the unit on

amplifiers or equipment

that may become hot.

The heat can damage the unit.

DO NOT

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 11 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

HDD and disc information

(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

Depending on the copy restriction level, these titles may not be recorded.

∫ Recording format

This unit records video in the following formats.

DVD Video Recording format [HDD] [RAM]

This is a recording method which allows you to record/copy and edit

television broadcasts and so on.

≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create Playlists (Video),

etc.

≥Copyright-protected titles (TV programmes) can be recorded to a

CPRM compatible disc using EXT LINK function.

DVD-Video format [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-

Video.

≥Copyright-protected titles cannot be recorded/copied even if using

a CPRM compatible disc.

≥After finalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and

other equipment.

+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.

You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar

way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.

≥Copyright-protected titles cannot be recorded/copied.

≥After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the

disc on DVD players and other equipment.

≥+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with

another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However,

discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can

be recorded onto the HDD.)

≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the

discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the

recording.

HDD and discs you can use for recording/copying and play

Disc type

Standard symbol

Hard disk drive (HDD)

[HDD]

≥Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.

For available recording/copying times for different discs

under different recording modes, see “Recording modes and

approximate recording/copying times” (> 23).

≥Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may

prevent you from playing or recording certain discs.

≥Please see specifications (> 84) for compatible disc

versions and recording speeds.

≥Recording M 1 and/or M 2 for bilingual broadcasts

(> 22, 52)

Data that can be recorded and played Video, Still picture, Music

Rewritable ≤

Timer recording ≤

Recording 16:9 aspect picture (> 22) ≤

Recording of copyright-protected titles

≤

Depending on the copy restriction level, these titles may not be recorded.

Disc type DVD-RAM DVD-R DVD-R DL

Standard symbol [RAM] [-R] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation (Video only)

[-R]DL] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation

Data that can be recorded and played Video, Still picture Video or Still picture

≥Videos and still pictures cannot be

mixed on one disc.

Video

Rewritable ≤ –

Play on other players ≤

≥This disc can be played back on

Panasonic DVD recorders and

DVD-RAM compatible DVD

players.

≤

≥Finalisation is needed (> 63).

≤

≥Finalisation is needed

(> 63).

≥This disc can be played

back only on equipment

compatible with DVD-R DL

discs.

Timer recording –

Recording 16:9 aspect picture (> 22) ≤

Recording of copyright-protected titles

≤

(EXT LINK)

–

Format (> 62) Necessary Unnecessary

Disc type DVD-RW +RW

–

+R DL

–

Standard symbol [-RW‹V›] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation

[+RW] [+R] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation

[+R]DL] before finalisation

[DVD-V] after finalisation

Data that can be recorded and played Video

Rewritable ≤ –

Play on other players ≤

≥Finalisation is needed

(> 63).

≤

≥This disc can be played

back only on equipment

compatible with +RW

discs.

≥If the disc failed to play

on other equipment, we

recommend you create

top menu (> 63).

≤

≥Finalisation is needed

(> 63).

≤

≥Finalisation is needed

(> 63).

≥This disc can be played

back only on equipment

compatible with +R DL

discs.

Timer recording –

Recording 16:9 aspect picture (> 22) ≤ – (4:3 aspect)

Recording of copyright-protected titles –

Format (> 62) Necessary

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 12 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Quick Start

Guide

Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.

≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating

instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm

≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring

≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit

and not finalised (> 85).

≥Discs recorded with AVCHD format.

≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL”

≥DVD-Audio

≥Blu-ray, HD DVD

≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,

SACD, MV-Disc, PD

≥DVD-RAM with a cartridge (TYPE 1)

When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a

title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.

(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)

§1

If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals

the picture will not be shown correctly.

§2

Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (> 69).

≥When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure that

you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or title (PAL or

NTSC) (> 69).

Play-only discs

Disc type Logo Standard symbol Uses

DVD-Video [DVD-V] High quality movie and music discs

DVD-RW (DVD

Video

Recording

format)

[-RW‹VR›] DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder

≥You can play copyright-protected titles if they have been recorded onto

a CPRM compatible disc.

≥By formatting (> 62) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video

format.

≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for

recording.

DVD-R

DVD-R DL

MP3/JPEG ≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in MP3

≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG

CD [CD]

Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW

)

– MP3/JPEG ≥CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3

≥CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG

Video CD [VCD]

≥Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW

)

SVCD

Discs that cannot be played

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD

for the type of connected TV

TV type Disc/Titles recorded

on HDD

Yes/No

Multi-system TV PAL ≤

NTSC ≤

PAL TV PAL ≤

NTSC

≤

§1

(PAL60)

NTSC TV PAL –

NTSC

≤

§2

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no

compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a

problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no

responsibility and offers no compensation for any

subsequent damage caused by such loss.

Examples of causes of such losses are

≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD

Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another

company.

≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this

unit.

≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer

disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this

unit.

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 13 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

USB memory information

≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.

≥If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc. is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to

this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.

≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.

MP3

≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,

play may not be possible.

Still pictures (JPEG

§2

)

§1

Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG and other

types of files is 4000.

§2

It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.

§3

When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not

display or be playable.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

≥Compatible formats:

ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats) and Joliet

≥This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-

R DL), but reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a

lot of sessions.

≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files

(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums) and some files (tracks)

may not display or be playable.

≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.

Other characters may not be displayed correctly.

≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is

displayed on a computer.

≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files

(tracks) and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order

you numbered them.

≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.

≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be

played.

[HDD] [RAM]

≥Compatible formats: DCF

§4

compliant (Content recorded on a

digital camera, etc.)

§4

Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established

by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries

Association (JEITA).

USB memories you can use on this unit

Compatible USB memories USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP

protocol:

– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.

≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.

≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.

CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.

≥

Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.

≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.

≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.

Format FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.

≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.

≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.

≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.

Indicated in these instructions by [USB]

Data that can be played or copied (≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

File format MP3 Still pictures (JPEG)

Playing ≤≤

Copying to HDD ≤≤

Instructions You can play and copy to HDD MP3 files recorded

with a computer onto the USB memory (> 36, 58).

You can play and copy to HDD or DVD-RAM still

pictures recorded with a computer onto the USB

memory (> 37, 56, 57).

Regarding Music files and still pictures (JPEG)

Note

Playable media: [HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

File format: MP3

≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

Maximum number of folders (groups or albums) recognizable:

300 folders (groups or albums) (including the root folder)

Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable

§1

: 3000 files (tracks)

Bit rates:

32 kbps to 320 kbps

Sampling frequency:

16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz

ID3 tags: compatible ([HDD] [USB])

Playable media: [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

File format: JPEG

≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.

Compatible pixels

Between 34k34 and 6400k6400 (Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Maximum number of folders

§3

recognizable: 300 folders

[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 300 folders

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Maximum number of files

§3

recognizable

§1

: 3000 files

[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000 files

MOTION JPEG/PROGRESSIVE JPEG: Not supported

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 14 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Quick Start

Guide

∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit

You can play Music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the

method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.

1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.

2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.

Automatic drive select function

[DVD-V] [VCD]

≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically

switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.

≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is

automatically selected.

≥When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the

cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.

≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side

of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc

and turn it over.

Inserting the USB memory

≥Before inserting any USB memory to

this unit, ensure that the data stored

therein has been backed up.

≥Check the orientation of the USB

connector and insert it straight in.

≥Insert an USB device while the unit is

stopped, so the “USB device” screen

is displayed. Select an item and press

[OK] to switch to the USB-related

operations (> 36, 56, 57).

Removing the USB memory

≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory

straight out.

≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may

be damaged.

∫ How to hold a disc

Do not touch the recorded surface.

∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc

Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

∫ Handling precautions

≥Be careful about scratches and dirt.

≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc

warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)

≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt

pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.

≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static

electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.

≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.

≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.

≥Do not use the following discs:

– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels

(rental discs, etc.).

– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.

– Irregularly shaped discs, such as

heart shapes.

≥Do not place in the following areas:

– In direct sunlight.

– In very dusty or humid areas.

– Near a heater.

– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature

(condensation can occur).

– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.

≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases

when you are not using them.

Structure of MP3 folders

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you

want to play them.

Structures of still picture folders

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Files inside a folder are displayed in the order

they were updated or taken.

[RAM]

Folders can be created on other equipment.

These folders cannot be selected as a

copying destination.

≥If a folder name or file name has been input

using other equipment, the name may not be

displayed properly or you may not be able to

play or edit the data.

Media handling (Disc/USB memory)

002

001

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

003

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

004.mp3

Root

Order of play

(folder=group)

(file=track)

P0000008.jpg

P0000009.jpg

P0000003.jpg

P0000004.jpg

P0000005.jpg

P0000001.jpg

P0000002.jpg

P0000006.jpg

P0000007.jpg

XXXX



jpg

DCIM

XXXXX

Root

Order of play

002 Folder

003 Folder

004 Folder

DCIM

JPEG

XXXX



.jpg

XXXX



.jpg

XXXXX

DCIM

XXXX



.jpg



Root

Inserting discs

Inserting/removing the USB memory

Insert label-up.

Note

Disc care

DO NOT

DO DO NOT

DO NOT

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 15 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Watching Television

Basic operations

This DVD recorder supports analogue

broadcasting, digital terrestrial broadcasting and

CATV broadcasting with H.264/MPEG-4 AVC and

MPEG-2 codec. But HD broadcasts are down-

converted to SD video when this unit receives

them.

Preparation

1 Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.

1 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.

Everytime you change the channel of digital broadcasts,

digital channel information appears automatically.

≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.

Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].

Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the

channels you watch often. (> 64, Favourites Edit)

1 While watching TV

Press [OK].

Channel List is displayed.

2 Press the “Blue” button to select the

“Favourite Select”.

The “Favourite Select” screen changes in the following order:

[DVB-C] (and analogue broadcasts)

All Channels (Except for Analogue Channels) J TV J Radio

J Analogue

§1

J Created Favourites

§2

J All Channels

[DVB-T] (and analogue broadcasts)

All Channels (Including Analogue Channels) J TV J Radio

J Created Favourites

§2

J All Channels

§1

Only when receiving analogue broadcast signal

§2

Created Favourites > 64, Favourites Edit

3 Press [3, 4] to select the channel

and press [OK].

Image of the selected channel is displayed.

Press [OK] again to exit Channel List if you select digital

broadcast channels.

≥It is possible to select the channel with the numbered

buttons too.

To sort the channels in alphabetical order:

Press the “Red” button to change the sorting mode.

≥For alphabetical sorting mode, skip backwards or forwards by a

letter with [2, 1].

To switch to the Multi Video screen

1 Press the “Yellow” button.

≥The additionally available sub-channels of the selected channel

are displayed.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the sub-channel and press [OK].

3 Press [OK] again.

≥Press the “Yellow” button to return to the Channel List.

Only for channels broadcasting in Multi Video.

≥Alphabetical sorting of the created Favourites is not possible in the

Channel List.

≥The Channel List is not displayed while recording, except with

High-Speed Copy.

≥Timer Recordings of Multi Video channels always record the main

channel.

≥“Locked” is displayed on the preview screen when selecting the

programme on which “Child Lock” works.

When “Subtitle” appears in digital channel information (> 17)

Press [STTL ].

≥Press again to hide the subtitle.

≥Programmes are recorded with subtitle when you record them with

the subtitle displayed (> 19).

You can enjoy Teletext broadcasting, including news, weather

forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the

broadcasters.

≥You can check if the programme has Teletext information.

“TXT” is indicated on the digital channel information (> 17).

1 While viewing the programme

Press [TEXT ].

Teletext screen appears.

2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

You can use the numbered buttons, the cursor buttons

[3, 4, 2, 1] and the coloured buttons.

To exit the screen

Press [TEXT ].

Select the channel

“D” means digital broadcasts.

Select the channel from Channel List

1: Encrypted channels are marked with a key symbol in the

corresponding table.

2: Preview of the selected channel is displayed.

(Digital broadcasts only)

3: Titles of the current programme and next programme are

displayed.

TIME SLIP

ヵユヹヵ

AUDIO

STTL

DISPLAY

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

CHAPTER

REC

-10s

MANUAL SKIP

+60s

STOP

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

INPUT

SELECT

PAGE

SLOW/SEARCH

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT



STATUS

EXIT

OPTION

RETURN

DELETE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PAUSE LIVE TV

SKIP



,,,

CH

DISPLAY

STATUS

OPTION

STTL

TEXT

CH

Numbered

buttons

Colour buttons

e.g.

Channel List

RETURN

SELECT

Sorting Mode Teletext Favourite SelectMulti Video

All Channels

Page -

Page +

1 Das Erste

2 ZDF

3 RTL Television

4 SAT.1

5 VOX

6 ProSieben

7 RTL2

8 kabel eins

9 Super RTL

1 Das Erste

15:10 Sturm der Liebe

16:00 Tagesschau

123...







e.g.,

To show subtitle (Digital broadcast only)

To show

Teletext

(Digital broadcast only)

Basic Teletext viewing

Note

DO 13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 100 ZDFtext

Current page

number

Colour button

bar

Date/time

e.g.

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 16 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Basic

operations

After performing step 1 (> 16, right column)

Press [OPTION] and press the

corresponding colour button.

≥The Teletext data received may not be displayed appropriately.

≥If a lot of Teletext information is available, then it may take a while

to be displayed.

≥Characters of the Teletext can be changed with “Teletext Character

Set” in “Display” of the Setup menu. (> 68)

When there are multiple audio or subtitle in the current channel, you

can select a language.

1 Press [DISPLAY].

2 Select “DVB Multi Audio” or “DVB

Subtitles”.

For DVB Multi Audio

1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Sound” menu and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Multi Audio” and press [1].

For DVB Subtitles

1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Other” menu and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Subtitles” and press [1].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the language.

While stopped

Press [STATUS ] to show the information

screen.

To switch information of the current programme and the next

programme

Press [2, 1].

To show detailed information about the programme

Press [STATUS ]

again (only when “info ” is displayed).

To hide the information screen

Press [STATUS ] once or twice.

Signal Quality

You can also select the other channel when the information screen is

displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].

∫ If the Child Lock message appears

If you set the “Child Lock” in the “Tuning” of the Setup menu (> 66)

to prevent your children from viewing inappropriate programmes, the

following message may appear.

To unlock this channel temporarily

1 Press [OK].

A confirmation screen appears

and press the

numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN.

2 Press [OK].

∫ If New Channel Message appears (> 65)

When a DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed

automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you

select “Yes” on the display, “Auto Setup” starts (all channel

settings are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also

cancelled.)

≥The display/hide setting can be changed (> 65, New Channel

Message).

Using Teletext conveniently

Reveal hidden data

Displays the hidden messages. (e.g., quiz page answers)

Press the “Red” button.

≥Press the “Red” button again to hide messages.

Change the screen size

You can change the Teletext screen size.

Press the “Green” button.

≥Each press of the “Green” button changes the display.

View temporarily a TV programme while the

Teletext screen is being displayed

Press the “Yellow” button.

≥Press the “Yellow” button again to return to the update page.

View sub page

If there are one or more sub pages, then the corresponding sub

pages can be displayed.

1 Press the “Blue” button. 2 Enter a 4-digit number of

the desired sub page with

the numbered buttons.

Sub page is displayed.

≥You can also select the sub page with [2, 1].

≥It may take some time for searching, during which time you can

watch TV (> above).

To select a language for DVB multi

audio or DVB subtitle (Digital broadcast

only)

DO 13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ZDFtext

(Normal)

(Top)

(Bottom)

Appears

when updating

is completed.

Broadcast

Note

Digital channel information

1 Programme name and

Broadcast time

2 Channel and Station Name

3 Progress of the current

programme

4 Signal Quality (> below)

5 Category (Favourite > 64)

6 Change the category

7 During scrambled

broadcasting (pay-TV etc.)

This is indicated in:

White: Can view

Yellow: Cannot view

Insert CAM with a certified

Smart Card (> 6).

8 Te l e t e x t ( > 16)

9 NOW:

Information about the current

programme

Information about the following

programme

: Programme is broadcast in

multi-channel sound (> left)

To change the audio language

(> 66, DVB Preferred

Language)

; Locked (> 66)

< Subtitle (> 16)

= To display detailed information

(> below)

CAM Upgrade Info (> 72)

No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received.

No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.

If “No Signal” is displayed:

≥Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly

broadcasting.

1 Das Erste

No Signal

All Channels

18:53

Change Category

info

ZDF-Mor

19:00 - 19:30

NOW

Multi Audio

Encrypted.

SubtitleTXT

    

 



Locked

Note

This channel is locked. Press OK to enter PIN.

Approved for children older than XX years.

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 17 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs

Refer to “Advanced playback” (> 33) for detail

information.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Turn on this unit.

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

HDD or DVD drive.

The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.

2 If you selected the DVD drive

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main

unit to open the tray and insert a disc.

≥Press the button again to close the tray.

3 Press [1](PLAY).

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Play starts from the most recently recorded title.

[DVD-V] [VCD]

Play starts from the point specified by the disc.

[CD]

Play starts from the beginning of the disc.

∫ Resume play function

[HDD]

If you play the title that was viewed once, the title is played

back from the point you have last stopped.

To start playing the title from the beginning, refer to “To play

the title from the beginning [HDD]” (> 34)

≥Resume play function for discs > 33, Operation during play

≥During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,

this unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System” (PAL/

NTSC) (> 69) setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before

playing them.

≥When playing back a title recorded on HDD, ensure that you match

the “TV System” (PAL/NTSC) setting to the recorded title (> 69).

≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,

pictures, sound, etc. to start.

≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you

may not always be able to control play as described in these

operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

∫ When a menu screen appears on the television

[DVD-V]

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].

≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.

≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu

screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].

[VCD]

Press the numbered buttons to select the item.

≥To return to the menu screen

[DVD-V]

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].

[VCD]

Press [RETURN ].

≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫]

when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your

television screen and so on.

≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen

may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN

and press [OK].

Menu operation for other type of contents

≥MP3 (> 36)

≥Still pictures (JPEG) (> 37)

≥Music on HDD (> 35)

≥Music CD (> 35)

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

CHAPTER

REC

-10s

MANUAL SKIP

+60s

STOP

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

INPUT

SELECT

PAGE

SLOW/SEARCH

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT



STATUS

EXIT

OPTION

RETURN

DELETE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PAUSE LIVE TV

SKIP

DRIVE

SELECT

,,,

STOP

OPTION

PLAY/x1.3

(PLAY)

RETURN



AUDIO



 OPEN/CLOSE

Numbered

buttons

e.g., 5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 18 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Basic

operations

Recording television programmes [HDD]

Refer to “Notes for recording” (> 22) for detail

information.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Turn on this unit.

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.

≥You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.

Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].

2 Press [REC MODE] to select the

recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).

≥Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times

(> 23)

e.g.,

3 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.

Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data

will not be overwritten.

≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during

recording.

≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer

recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to

begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and

the timer recording will begin.

≥[Analogue] When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”

(> 67), you can change the audio being received by

pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (This operation does not

affect the audio of the recordings.)

∫ To pause recording

Press [;].

Press again to restart recording.

You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.

(Title is not split into separate titles.)

∫ To stop recording

Press [∫].

≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.

≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen

may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN

and press [OK].

≥If you record programmes on which “Child Lock” works partially,

PIN code entry is required when playing back the recordings.

≥When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that

is not being received correctly, the digital channel information

(> 17) is also recorded and remains visible during playback.

≥If you try to record recording prohibited programmes, “$” is

displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

If a programme to record has subtitle or multiple audio, you can

record with subtitle or selected audio.

To record with subtitle

Before start recording, press [STTL ] to

show the subtitle.

If the programme has multiple subtitle, select the desired language

(> 17).

≥Subtitle cannot be switched after recording.

To record with the selected audio

Before start recording, select the desired language for audio (> 17).

During recording

Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select

the recording time.

≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.

≥The unit display changes as shown below.

≥This does not work during timer recordings (> 20, 27) or while

using Flexible Recording (> 24).

≥This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated

for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch

Recording, if “Auto Standby after OTR” is set to “On” in the Setup

menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)

To cancel

Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter

appears.

≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording

continues.

To stop recording

Press [∫].

This function is only for recording on HDD.

≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.

Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)

“D” means digital broadcasts.

TIME SLIP

STTL

DISPLAY

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

CHAPTER

REC

-10s

MANUAL SKIP

+60s

STOP

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

INPUT

SELECT

PAGE

SLOW/SEARCH

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT



STATUS

EXIT

OPTION

RETURN

DELETE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PAUSE LIVE TV

SKIP

PAUSE



STOP

REC MODE

STTL

REC

AUDIO

CH



ヵユヹヵ



REC

CH

Numbered

buttons

e.g.

32:35

65:11

130:25

260:04

Recording Mode

Rec Mode Remain

SELECT

≥To record sound using

LPCM (XP mode only):

Set the “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” to “LPCM” in

the Setup menu (> 68).

When recording digital broadcast with

subtitle or multiple audio

To specify a time to stop recording—

One Touch Recording

OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00

^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}

REC

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 19 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Timer recording [HDD]

Refer to “Advanced timer recording [HDD]”

(> 27–32) for detail information.

See also “TV Guide system” (> 9) and “Notes for recording”

(> 22).

Depending on the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the

title you are trying to record.

≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.

(Each daily, weekly or series programme (> 32) is counted as one

programme.)

You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 70).

1 Press [GUIDE].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

future programme and press [OK].

≥Make corrections if necessary using [3, 4, 2, 1] (> 27,

step 3).

≥If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the

start recording time and finish recording time can be set to a

margin of up to 10 minutes. (> 67, Start Recording Time,

Finish Recording Time)

≥Programme Name may not be displayed correctly on the

“Timer Recording” screen. In this case, enter the

Programme Name manually (> 50).

3 Press [OK].

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is

displayed.

“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording

standby has been activated.

Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.

Press [Í] to turn the unit off.

∫ To delete a timer recording setting on the TV

Guide screen (Digital broadcast only)

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide

and press [OK].

“Selection Screen” appears.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV

Guide disappears.)

∫ To cancel recording when recording has already

begun (> 28)

∫ To release the unit from recording standby

(> 27)

∫ Notes on timer recording (> 28)

∫ Change TV Guide Type for Digital broadcasts or

Analogue broadcasts (> 71)

This function is only for recording on HDD.

≥You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.

Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)

Using the TV Guide system to make timer

recordings

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

CHAPTER

REC

-10s

MANUAL SKIP

+60s

STOP

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

INPUT

SELECT

PAGE

SLOW/SEARCH

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT



STATUS

EXIT

OPTION

RETURN

DELETE

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PAUSE LIVE TV

SKIP



,,,

GUIDE

AUDIO

Note

Landscape

TV Guide:

Wed 12.10.11 04:32

All Channels

SELECT

RETURN

Guide

Change Display Mode

Page

All Types

Time:

info

Wed 12.10.

OPTION: Free Word Search

+24 hours

Prog. Type

Category

Time:

info

Wed 12.10.

Volle Kanne - Sevice tägl

Wege zu

Das Erste

ZDF

RTL Television

SAT.1

VOX

ProSieben

RTL2

ZDF-Morgenmagazin

Deutschland singt

Rote Rosen

Punkt 6

ZDF-Morgenmagazin

Das Erste

4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30

4:30-5:30

St. Tro Eine himmlische Was für ein Zirkus

Lebe deine

StarWars - Episode I: Die dunkle

Frühstücksfernsehen Vera

Informerci

Frauentausch

Gute Zei Mein Bab Die Kind

OPTION: Free Word Search

All ChannelsNews

Wed 12.10.11 04:32

e.g., Programme type,

“News” is selected in

step 2 of Landscape

view.

Note

Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer

recordings (Analogue broadcast only)

Input ShowView Number 0-9, and press OK.

ShowView

Record

30:24 SP

HDDRemain

TUE 11.10.11. 12:53:00

Timer

Recording

30:24 SP

HDD

Remain

Mode

Stop Start Channel Date

STTL

Drive

17:00 16:00 18. 10. TUE −−−

1 ARD

Programme Name

HDD

Analogue : ARD

TUE 11.10.11. 12:53:00

e.g.,

No.

Channel

ARD



Timer icon

Mode

Stop

STTL

Drive

HDD

Drive

space

17:00

−−−

Programme

Check to make sure “OK” is

displayed (> 27).

e.g.,

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 30 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Advanced

operations

≥To change the settings of the TV Guide for digital broadcasts

(> 71)

≥Information for digital channels is not displayed in the TV Guide for

the analogue broadcasts.

You can change the basic settings for your GUIDE Plus+ list.

1 Press [GUIDE].

2 Press [OPTION].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and

press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select an item and

press [OK].

≥Existing information can be lost by changing the Postal Code or

Host Channel.

≥Entry of the wrong Postal Code or Host channel can lead to the

receipt of wrong or no data.

≥To change the settings, release the unit from recording standby

(> 27).

∫ Host Channel

(As of January 2013)

≥Which channels appear in the GUIDE Plus+ list depends on local

reception conditions. Sub-optimum reception quality can result in

missing or incomplete GUIDE Plus+ data.

After performing steps 1-2 (> left)

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Editor” and

press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the desired

“Name” and press [1].

You can also press [WXCH] to browse through the station

list.

Changing the Settings and Editing TV

Guide for Analogue broadcasts

Changing the settings

Postal

Code

To enter the Postal Code

The entry of the Postal Code is required to receive

regional data.

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to

enter your Postal Code and press [OK].

Host

Channel

To change the Host Channel manually

The GUIDE Plus+ System information is transferred

via the Host Channel. The “Auto” setting is

recommended. A Host Channel is then set by the

system automatically.

1 Press [3, 4] to select the desired station and

press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The setting of the Host Channel can take some time.

≥To check the host channel > right, Host Channel

Data

Download

To download GUIDE Plus+ data manually

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

The update can take approximately 2 hours.

≥For further information > 10, TV Guide data

download

Night

Download

To select the priority during midnight

The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM

every day. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete

data download.

If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a

timer recording overlap, you can select which will be

given priority.

On: Data Download

Timer recording does not start or is interrupted

for data download.

Off: Timer programming

GUIDE Plus+ data will not be downloaded.

After recording finishes, we recommend you to

change this setting to “On”.

Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].

Note

RETURN

Setup

Postal Code

EUROS

Night Download

Data Download

Host Channel

XXXXX

12.1. Wed 15:05

Note

Regions Host Channel

Hamburg / Schleswig-Holstein Bibel TV

Berlin-Brandenburg sixx

Bayern DAS VIERTE

Editing TV Guide

On/Off To select the stations to be displayed on the

programme list.

Only stations set to “On” are displayed in the GUIDE

Plus+ list.

Press [3, 4] to change the “On/Off” settings and

press [OK].

Reference To set the appropriate Reference manually

If “No Data” appears in the GUIDE Plus+ list for a

station, this station is either not supported by the

GUIDE Plus+ data or a GUIDE Plus+ Reference could

not be clearly assigned (“----” appears in the

Reference field of this station). In this case, set the

appropriate Reference manually.

You can also manually assign the appropriate

Reference even if a station name was not recognized

(e.g. ***06).

Press [3, 4] to change the “Reference” setting of the

appropriate station and press [OK].

The station names in the Reference list can deviate

from the station list.

Note

RETURN

Editor

12.1. Wed 15:05

Tuner

ARTE On

TF6 On

TF1 On

ESPRT On Euros

FR6

- - - -

ARD

On BBC1 BBC1

ZDF

ARD

Name

On/Off

Reference

Source

***04

***05

***06

WDR

PAGE+



RETURN

TIMER REC

OPTION

GUIDE

Display Mode

PAGE-

PAGE+



+24 hours

Prog. Type

ARD

PRO7

***06

SAT1

RTL

ZDF

Time:

15:00

15:30 16:00 16:30

Prog. Type

All Types

Landscape

12.1 Wed

15:05~16:05

7th Heaven

Ta...

Abenteuer...

Fliege-Die Talkshow

...

Derrick

Heute in ...

Bianca-Wege...

Das Familiengericht

Das Jugendgericht

Richterin Barbara Sa...

Richter Alexander...

7th Heaven

Gilmore...

Abenteuerurlaub

Aktuell

...

No Data

MDR

12.1. Wed 15:05

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 31 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Advanced timer recording [HDD]

Instructions/notes on this page are only applicable to those

who use the GUIDE Plus+ system for Digital terrestrial

broadcasts.

≥For more information about the GUIDE Plus+ system, refer to “TV

Guide system” and “TV Guide data download” (> 9, 10).

You can record all the episodes of a series by setting just one timer

recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system.

After performing steps 1-2 (> 20)

1 While “Selection Screen” is displayed,

Press [3, 4] to select “Series Timer

Rec.” and press [OK].

2 Press [OK].

This unit automatically records the programmes that are

identified to be of the same series by the GUIDE Plus+ data.

∫ To check the schedule of the series

Press the “Blue” button in the “Selection Screen“.

:The episode to be recorded

The same icon is also displayed on the GUIDE Plus+ list.

:Repeat programme

≥The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no episode

of the series for 13 weeks.

≥Titles recorded using series recording are bundled and displayed

as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 34) except

when using Auto Renewal Recording.

≥If the same episode has already been set for series timer recording

at a different time or on another channel, “Series Timer Rec.” will

not be selectable in the “Selection Screen”.

≥If the unit cannot record the first run, the unit will record the repeat

programme if it is available. However, this unit will not record the

repeat programme, if any part of the first run is recorded.

≥You cannot change Channel, Date and Drive in the timer recording

setting screen. You can set the start time earlier and the end time

later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10 minutes.

≥“-------” is displayed on a series recording item in the timer

recording list if there will be no episode of the series for the next 8

days. We recommend you delete the “-------” item after you confirm

the last episode of the series is recorded.

1 During play or while stopped, press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select

“VIDEO”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.

3 Press [OPTION].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “TV Guide Explorer” and press [OK].

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Series Timer Rec” and press [OK].

> Go to step 2. (> left)

1 Press [GUIDE].

2 Press [OPTION].

≥While the advertisement information is not captured, “Enter

Words” screen is displayed. (> 29, Searching by entering

words)

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Advert”, then press [OK].

The advertisement screen is displayed.

≥Some advertisements are for future programmes and you can set

the timer recording of the programmes using the advertisement

screen.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

≥To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the

information.

To update the information continuously, this unit must be left in

standby mode at night.

≥If advertisement is not displayed correctly, check the correct post

code is entered in the Setup menu (> 71, Post Code).

To change advertisements

Press [3, 4].

[DVB-T] Series recording

Selection Screen

Tue 11.10.11 12:54

RETURN

View

Single Timer Rec.

Series Timer Rec.

Delete

Series Info



Tue 11.10.11

Name Date Contents

Series Information

ABC1

3. 1. Wed

21:30-22:30

26.12. Wed

21:30-22:30

19.12. Wed

21:30-22:30

12.12. Wed

21:30-22:30

5.12. Wed

21:30-22:30

Decameron 1

Decameron 2

Decameron 3

Decameron 4

Decameron 1

Tue 11.10.11 12:54



Note

[DVB-T] Useful functions in GUIDE Plus+

system

Searching using the information of Series recording

programmes on HDD

Viewing

advertisement in the TV Guide system

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 32 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Advanced

operations

Advanced playback

≥Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.

≥Refer to “Playing music” for playing music. (> 35)

Press [AUDIO].

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and analogue broadcast

LR>L>R

^---------------}

e.g., “L R” is selected

[DVD-V]

You can change the audio channel number each time you press the

button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack

language (> 60, Soundtrack).

You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.

≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R

DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.

≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 68).

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting

is “On” > 67).

Operation during play

Stop

Press [∫].

The stopped position is memorized.

Resume play function

Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.

Stopped position

[HDD] :

Stopped position for each title is memorized.

≥To play the title from the beginning [HDD] > 34

Discs :

Only previous stopped position is memorized.

The position is cleared if the tray is opened.

≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is

cleared in some cases.

≥([VCD]) The position is cleared if the unit is

turned off.

Pause

Press [;].

Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Press [6] or [5].

≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R]

[+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

≥Audio is heard during first level search

forward.

Skip

During play or while paused, press

[:] or [9].

Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to

play.

≥Each press increases the number of skips.

Starting

from a

selected

title

Press the numbered buttons.

Play starts from the selected title, chapter or

track.

≥[HDD]

e.g.,

5: [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [1] > [5]

≥Other discs

Input a 2-digit number

e.g.,

5: [0] > [5]

15: [1] > [5]

≥This works only when

stopped (the screen on the

right is displayed on the television) with some

discs.

≥[VCD] (with playback control)

If you press the numbered buttons while

stopped (the above screen is displayed on the

television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play

time appears on the unit’s display.)

Quick

View

[HDD] [RAM]

Press and hold [1](PLAY/a1.3).

Play speed is quicker than normal.

≥Press again to return to normal speed.

Slow-

motion

[HDD] [RAM] [-R]

[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R]

[+R]DL] [+RW]

[DVD-V]

[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

While paused, press [6] or [5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.

≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is

continued for approximately 5 minutes

(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).

Frame-by-

frame

[HDD] [RAM] [-R]

[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R]

[+R]DL] [+RW]

[DVD-V]

[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

While paused, press [2] (2;) or

[1] (;1).

Each press shows the next frame.

≥Press and hold to change in succession

forward or backward.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.

Skipping

the

specified

time (Time

Slip)

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] [-R]DL]

[-RW‹V›] [+R]

[+R]DL]

(This function

does not work

with finalised

discs.)

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

1 Press [TIME SLIP].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the time

and press [OK].

Play skips the specified time.

≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time

increases [3] or decreases [4] by

1-minute intervals. (Press and hold for

10-minute intervals.)

This automatically disappears after

approximately 5 seconds. To show the screen

again press [TIME SLIP] again.

Manual

Skip

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] [-R]DL]

[-RW‹V›] [+R]

[+R]DL]

(This function

does not work

with finalised

discs.)

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

1-minute skip function:

Press [MANUAL SKIP +60s].

Each time you press, play skips forward

approximately 1 minute.

10-second skip back function:

Press [MANUAL SKIP -10s].

Each time you press, play skips backward

approximately 10 seconds.

Create

Chapter

(> 42, Chapter)

[HDD] [RAM]

Press [CHAPTER].

Chapters are divided at the point pressed.

≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a

chapter.

≥Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK

standby.

Changing audio during play

5 min

PLAY

L R

HDD

Soundtrack

1 ENG Digital 3/2.1ch

e.g., English is selected.

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 33 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You

can also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”

button to select “VIDEO”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title

and press [OK].

You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles

screen only).

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]

“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”

1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed

Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

e.g.,

Grouped Titles screen

Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly or series timer

recording mode are bundled and displayed as one item.

Select the item marked with and press [OK] to display the

bundled titles.

All Titles screen

Displays all titles.

[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)

This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback

from many titles.

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

If you select an item other than “No.”

≥The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback

of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles

continuously.)

≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being

played back.

≥If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch to

another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be

cancelled.

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press [OK].

[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary titles.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OPTION].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press

[OK].

Create Group:

Press [2

, 1]

to select “Create” and press [OK].

Selected titles are bundled to form a group.

Release Grouping:

Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].

≥When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group

are released.

≥When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from

the group.

∫ Regarding the group name

The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.

To change the group name

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name” and press [OK].

4 Enter the name. (> 50, Entering text)

≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will

not be changed.

This function is only available for Videos and not available for music

or still pictures.

You can start playing back the title from the beginning while the

resume play function is activated.

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play from beginning” and press

[OK].

e.g., [HDD]

5: [0] > [0] > [5] 15: [0] > [1] > [5]

115: [1] > [1] > [5]

e.g., [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]

[ Currently recording.

Title protected.

Title that was not recorded due to recording

protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)

t Title cannot be played

[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is

damaged etc.]

Title with copyright protection (> 85, CPRM)

Groups of titles ([HDD] only)

Title that was recorded but has not yet been played

([HDD] only)

Titles that are restricted from viewing by Child Lock

function ([H

DD] only) (> 66)

(NTSC)

(PAL)

Title recorded using a different encoding system from

that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.

≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit

(> 69).

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR

appearance

All Titles

PICTURE/MUSIC

Table Display

“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”

“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

10.10.

HDD

MUSIC

PICTURE

VIDEO

11.10.

DolphinsChantal Show

(in Thumbnail Display)

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles

ARD 10.10. FRI

007

- - - - - -

HDD

- - -

ARD 18.10. SAT

009

ARD 11.10. SAT

008

MUSIC

PICTURE

VIDEO

(in Thumbnail Display)

To sort the titles for easy searching

To play grouped titles [HDD]

To edit the group of titles [HDD]

To play the title from the beginning

[HDD]

Release Grouping

Create Group

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

Page 02/02

10.10.

HDD

MUSIC

PICTURE

VIDEO

RETURN

11.10.

DolphinsChantal Show

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

Page 01/01

HDD

VIDEO

RETURN

ARD 18.10. SAT ARD 11.10. SAT

Dolphins Dolphins 2

Select

OPTION OPTION

Select

Info

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 34 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Advanced

operations

Playing music

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”

and press [OK].

The music CD starts playing back.

You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

Copying music to HDD (> 58)

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to

select “MUSIC”.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the album and

press [OK].

You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.

3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and

press [OK].

You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.

Operations during play

To play music CD

e.g.,

5: [0] > [5]

15: [1] > [5]

To play music recorded on HDD

e.g.,

5: [0] > [0] > [5] 115: [1] > [1] > [5]

15: [0] > [1] > [5]

e.g.,

5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5] 115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5]

15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5] 1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]

RETURN

SELECT

Play Music

Copy Music

Note

Useful functions during music play

Stop

Press [∫].

The stopped position is memorized.

Resume play function

Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.

≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is

cleared.

≥Discs: The position is cleared if the tray is

opened or the unit is turned off.

≥[HDD] The position is cleared if the unit is turned

off.

Pause

Press [;].

Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Press [6] or [5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

≥Audio is heard during all levels of search.

Skip

During play or while paused, press [:] or

[9].

Skip to the track you want to play.

≥Each press increases the number of skips.

Repeat

Play

[HDD]

You can select the item which you want to repeat.

While playing

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play Setting”

and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

≥Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.

Sort

[HDD]

You can change the order of the Album View

alphabetically.

While Album View screen is displayed

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name” and

press [OK].

To cancel the sorted screen

Press [3, 4] to select “No.” and press [OK].

Properties

[HDD] [CD]

While Track View screen is displayed

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press

[OK].

≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 35 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Playing Music files and still pictures (JPEG)

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

1 Insert the disc.

2 If the menu screen appears, press [3, 4] to select the item and

press [OK].

e.g., [CD]

[USB]

1 Insert the USB memory.

2 Press [3, 4] to select a file type and press [OK].

e.g.

3 If the menu screen appears, press [3, 4] to select the item and

press [OK].

e.g., Picture

∫ Showing the menu with FUNCTION MENU

Display

e.g. selecting a file to play

1 Press [RETURN ] several times to exit the menu.

2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

3 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

[USB]

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,

DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

≥

You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording or copying.

1 Show MP3 Menu screen.

(> left)

≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and

press [OK].

Play starts on the selected track.

≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.

≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

To stop playing

Press [∫].

To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

1 While the file list is displayed

Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display

the tree screen.

2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press

[OK].

The file list for the group appears.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Showing the menu screen

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select file type and press [OK].

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select file type and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the item (“View Pictures ( JPEG )” or

“Play Music ( MP3 )”) and press [OK].

Disc

Play Music ( MP3 )

Copy Music ( MP3 )

View Pictures ( JPEG )

USB device

Video ( MPEG2 )

Picture ( JPEG )

Music ( MP3 )

USB device

View Pictures ( JPEG )

Start Slideshow

Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )

Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )

Copy Selected Pictures ( JPEG )

Playing Music files

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]

Using the tree screen to find a group

Selected group No. /Total groups

If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.

You cannot select groups

that contain no

compatible files.

001 Both Ends Freezing

002 Lady Starfish

003 Life on Jupiter

004 Metal Glue

005 Paint It Yellow

006 Pyjamamama

007 Shrimps from Mars

008 Starperson

1 : My favorite

Total Track

Tree

G 1

T 1

TOTAL

1/111

MP3 Menu

0 9

–

Number

Group No.

Prev.

Selected group

G: Group No.

T: Track No. in the group

TOTAL:

Track No./Total tracks in

all groups

Tree

G 7/25

001 My favorite

001 Brazilian pops

002 Chinese pops

003 Czech pops

004 Hungarian pops

005 Liner notes

006 Japanese pops

007 Mexican pops

008 Philippine pops

MP3 Menu

Number

G 8

T 14

TOTAL

40/111

MP3 music

–

0 9

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 36 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Advanced

operations

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

≥You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.

1 Show Album View screen.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

(> 36, Showing the menu screen)

[HDD] [RAM]

While stopped

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.

2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button

to select “PICTURE”.

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press

[OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

album and press [OK].

You can also select album with the numbered buttons.

3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still

picture and press [OK].

You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.

≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.

≥Useful functions during still picture play (> 38)

To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View

screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

∫ Regarding Album View screen

Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the

shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (> 46).

≥Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC

etc., the information about the recording date may not be

displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].

Sample pictures

≥

Sample JPEG pictures are pre-installed on HDD of this unit. You can

play them back or start slideshow (

below) with them.

If you want to delete sample pictures, perform “Cancel Protection”

and then delete them. (> 46)

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval with

favourite music.

1 While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen is

displayed

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

album.

2 Press [1](PLAY).

You can also start Slideshow by pressing [OPTION] and press

[3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and then press [OK].

To select multiple albums for starting Slideshow:

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.

2 Press [;].

A check mark appears.

≥Press [;] again to cancel the selection.

3 Repeat steps 1-2 until you select all necessary albums.

4 Perform step 2.

To select all albums for starting Slideshow:

1 Press [∫] in step 1.

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

3 Perform step 2.

[USB]

To start Slideshow on the menu screen:

1 Insert the USB memory.

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 36)

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow”, and press [OK].

≥Sample Music is selected for default Background Music, which is

played with Slideshow. Refer to “Slideshow Settings” to turn off or

change the Background Music. (> 38)

Playing still pictures

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

Picture and folder protected

Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])

e.g.,

5: [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [1] > [5]

115: [1] > [1] > [5]

e.g.,

5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5] 115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5]

15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5] 1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View

Slideshow

Page 01/01

RETURN

OPTION

HDD

Select All

Playlist View

001

- - -

002

Total 20--.--.--

Total 3

Date: 1. 2.2006Sample

MUSIC

PICTURE

VIDEO

Album View screen

Regarding Album View

screen > right

Sample pictures > right

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View

Page 001/001

0001

Album Name

103__DVD

0002 0003 0004

0005 0006 0007 0008

0009

---- ---- ----

RETURN

OPTION

HDD

PICTURE

Slideshow

e.g., HDD

[HDD] [RAM]

Grouped by date

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Album

Number of pictures/Shooting

date

Shooting date/Number of pictures/

Album name

Start Slideshow

Total 68

Date: 10.10. 2010

002

Total 24 10.10. 10

Zoological park

002

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 37 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Playing Music files and still pictures (JPEG)

While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen is displayed

(> 37)

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow

Settings” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture

Settings” or “Background Music Settings” and

press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1]

to select the setting.

After finishing settings, press [3, 4, 2, 1] to

select “Set” and press [OK].

Picture Settings

Background Music Settings

≥Music albums on HDD, a disc and a USB memory can be used as

the Slideshow Background Music. However, when selecting still

images on a disc or a USB memory for the slideshow, music

albums on the same media cannot be used as the Background

Music. (Even if a music album on the same media is selected, the

music is not played.)

≥“Sample Music” cannot be deleted or changed to other files.

≥“Music Selection” setting turns back to “Sample Music” when

removing media on which specified Background Music is recorded

or deleting specified Background Music files.

≥DTS-CD cannot be played back as Slideshow Background Music.

≥“Rotate RIGHT/Rotate LEFT” or “Zoom in/Zoom out” does not work

during Slideshow.

While playing

1 Press [OPTION].

2Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate

RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press

[OK].

≥Rotation information will not be stored.

– [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures

– When disc or album is protected

– When played on other equipment

– When copying pictures

– When changing date

While playing

1 Press [OPTION].

2Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in”

and press [OK].

≥To return the picture to its original size, press

[3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press

[OK].

≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.

≥The enlargement information will not be stored.

≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures

smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.

While playing

Press [STATUS ] twice.

To exit the picture properties screen

Press [STATUS ].

Useful functions during still picture

play

Slideshow Settings

Display Interval: Selects the desired interval. (“Normal”,

“Long” or “Short”)

Repeat Play: Selects “On” to play pictures in the selected

album repeatedly.

Random: Selects “On” to play pictures in the selected

album at random.

Background Music:

Selects “On” to play Slideshow with Background

Music.

Selects “Off” to play Slideshow without Background

Music.

Random: Selects “On” to play Background Music at random.

Music Selection:

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Music Selection” and

press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of

Background Music and press [OK].

≥“Sample Music” is Background Music pre-

installed on HDD.

3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for

Background Music and press [OK] when

selecting other than “Sample Music”.

Slideshow Settings

Start Slideshow

Picture Settings

Please set the following functions.

RETURN

SELECT

Display Interval

Normal

Repeat Play

Random

Off

SetSet Cancel

Background Music Settings

Please set the following functions.

RETURN

SELECT

Background Music

Random

Off

Music Selection

Sample Music

SetSet Cancel

Note

Rotate RIGHT/Rotate LEFT

Zoom in/Zoom out

Properties

Rotate LEFT

Rotate RIGHT

RETURN

Zoom in

Rotate LEFT

Rotate RIGHT

RETURN

18:53:50 11.10.

Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006

Date 1. 1. 2011 No. 3 / 9

Shooting date

e.g., HDD

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 38 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Advanced

operations

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

”/Q Link)

You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using

“HDAVI Control” or Q Link.

Preparation

1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully

wired 21-pin Scart cable (> 7), or to your receiver using an HDMI

cable (> 7).

2 Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 69). (The default setting is “On”.)

3 Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment

(e.g., TV).

≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be

used as “HDAVI Control”.

4 Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this

unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI

Control” function works properly.

Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat

this procedure.

Preparation

≥Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

(> 6).

For your reference

The following systems from other manufacturers have similar

function to Q Link from Panasonic.

For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult

your dealer.

≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)

≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)

≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)

≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)

≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)

What you can do with “HDAVI Control” and Q Link

[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]

When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode ([VIERA]Link]) or AV

input mode ([Q]Link]) and the TV displays the corresponding action.

(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]

§2

, [1](PLAY)

§3

, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView], [PROG/CHECK] etc.

When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action.

(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]

§2

, [1](PLAY)

§3

, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView], [PROG/CHECK] etc.

≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] SVCD and MP3

The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.

When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even if

the FUNCTION MENU etc. is displayed during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording.

Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, finalising etc.

≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn off.

This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.

≥Depending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function may not work.

Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.

Recording starts.

≥The titles are recorded to the HDD.

To stop recording

Press [∫].

≥If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV Recording, the Direct TV Recording may stop.

≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display (> 25), Direct TV Recording is unavailable.

§1

[VIERA]Link] This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.

§2

This button is available only when this unit is on.

§3

When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents

from where playback started.

In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.

≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.

≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.

What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?

VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that

offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV

(VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this

function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable.

See the operating instructions for connected equipment for

operational details.

≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions

provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI

CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that

we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other

manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be

guaranteed.

≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.

“HDAVI Control 5” is the standard for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control

compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with

Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.

≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’

equipment supporting VIERA Link function.

What is Q Link?

Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this

unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting

the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.

Easy playback

Power on link

Power off link

Direct TV Recording

§1

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 39 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

”/Q Link)

[VIERA]Link]

If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.

You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.

The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.

Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.

≥The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.

≥The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.

Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.

1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” using the TV remote control.

≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.

2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control, and press [OK].

≥About the FUNCTION MENU Display (> 5, 41, 68).

By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (> below) and display the Top Menu for DVD-Video.

∫ Using the Control Panel

Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.

Select “Control Panel” and press [OK] in step 2 (> above).

The Control Panel is displayed (> right).

≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.

–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.

≥While playing still pictures

–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.

§1

This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.

§2

Displayed only when selecting “View” in the FUNCTION MENU.

∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode

Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.

∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”

Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 69).

Easy control only with VIERA remote control

Using the FUNCTION MENU to operate this unit

§1

Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit

§1

1 Press [OPTION].

You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for DVD-Video

is displayed and while DVD-Video is being copied.

2 Select an item then press [OK].

Channel List

§2

Channel List is displayed (> 16)

Switch to TV

§2

Displayed when watching with the tuner of

this unit. It will return to the TV picture.

Control Panel Control Panel is displayed (> below).

FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION MENU is displayed (> above).

Top Menu [DVD-V] Top menu is displayed (> 18).

Menu [DVD-V] Menu is displayed (> 18).

Standby Settings “Standby Settings” screen is displayed

(> 70).

Drive Select Select the HDD or DVD drive

Slideshow “Album View” screen is displayed (> 37).

Rotate RIGHT (JPEG)

Rotate LEFT (JPEG)

Rotate the still picture (> 38).

Zoom in (JPEG)

Zoom out (JPEG)

Enlarge or shrink the still picture (> 38).

Drive Select

Control Panel

Top Menu

FUNCTION MENU

e,g.,

Note

Play

Exit

ause

Sto

Control Panel

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 40 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Advanced

operations

Convenient functions

By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main functions

quickly and easily.

If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu,

FUNCTION MENU automatically appears when you turn the power

on. (> 68)

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of

disc.

2 Press [3, 4] to select a function and

press [OK].

≥If you press [RETURN ], you can return to the previous

screen.

3 Press [3, 4] to select an item and

press [OK].

≥Refer to “Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION

MENU Display” about each function. (> 5)

To exit the FUNCTION MENU

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s

tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is

useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.

If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme

temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

1 Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the

connections to this unit.

2 Turn on this unit and press [WXCH]

to select the channel.

3 When you want to pause the TV programme

Press [PAUSE LIVE TV].

This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can

turn off this icon (> 68, Pause Live TV Icon).

4 When you want to resume

Press [1](PLAY).

≥The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode

(> 23) regardless of the recording mode and the drive

selected before starting saving.

≥At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be

temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending

on the HDD free space.)

Operation during Pause Live TV

≥The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer

recording starts.

≥The Pause Live TV function does not work

– when the clock is not set

– while recording

– while timer recording

– while EXT LINK recording, etc.

≥Audio or Subtitle cannot be switched during resume play.

≥The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is

full or the saving lasts 8 hours.

≥The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after

started.

≥“DVB Multi Audio” and “DVB Subtitles” of on-screen menu cannot

be switched during Pause Live TV.

≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen

may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN

and press [OK].

≥“Pause Live TV” does not work while viewing recording prohibited

programmes.

FUNCTION MENU Display

Video

Picture

Music

RETURN

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

Others

Drive Select

FUNCTION MENU

Remain

30:00 SP

HDD

View

RETURN

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

Others

Drive Select

FUNCTION MENU

Remain

30:00 SP

HDD

Video

Picture

Music

View

To pause the TV programme you are

watching—Pause Live TV

Press [6, 5].

Pause

Press [;].

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.

Quick View

Press and hold [1](PLAY/a1.3).

≥Press again to return to the normal speed.

Slow-

motion

While paused, press [6] or

[5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Stop Pause

Live TV

1Press [∫].

2Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”

and press [OK].



L R

HDD

4 DVB

ABC

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 41 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Editing titles/chapters

Editing

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.)

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

≥The maximum number of items on a disc:

[HDD]

– Titles: 499

– Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title

(Depends on the state of recording.)

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

– Titles: 99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)

– Chapters: Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)

(Depends on the state of recording.)

≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot

be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.

≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.

≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.

dividing a title etc).

≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the

free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount

of free space decreases.

We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.

You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded

programmes.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connection to this unit.

≥Turn the unit on.

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded

title to be edited.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> 62, Setting the protection).

1 During play or while stopped

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”

button to select “VIDEO”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.

3 Press [OPTION].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and

press [OK].

∫ If you select “Chapter View”

5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

chapter.

To start play > Press [OK].

To edit > Step 6.

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> left)

6 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

≥You can go back to Title View.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Chapter

Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.

[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a

Playlist (Video) (> 44).

“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 67)

“Automatic”:

Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the end of

the programme) in the scene during recording and sets chapter

start points on them automatically.

≥Depending on the programme to be recorded or the Recording

Mode, the chapter start points may not be created correctly.

“5 minutes”:

Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at

approximately 5-minute interval.

Editing titles/chapters and playing

chapters

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press

[OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)

A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

Title

Note

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

Page 02/02

10.10. 11.10.

008

HDD

RETURN

MUSIC

PICTURE

VIDEO

Select

Info

OPTION

Title View screen

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Partial Delete

Divide Title

Change Thumbnail

Enter Title Name

Properties

Edit

Create Group

Release Grouping

Table Display

PICTURE/MUSIC

All Titles

Chapter View

Delete

Play from beginning

Find Titles

Refer to “Title

operations”

(> 43).

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR

appearance (> 34)

≥Playing still pictures (> 37)

≥To play music recorded on HDD (> 35)

To edit the group of titles [HDD] (> 34)

> below

To search programmes on TV Guide

(> 29)

e.g.,

Refer to “To play the title

from the beginning [HDD]”

(> 34).

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Chapter View

008 11.10. Dinosaur

HDD

0:31.24

VIDEO

Chapter View screen

Create Chapter

Combine Chapters

Title View

Delete Chapter

Refer to “Chapter

operations” (> 43).

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 42 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Editing

After performing steps 1–4 (> 42)

Multiple editing is possible.

After performing steps 1–6 (> 42)

Multiple editing is possible.

Title operations

Delete

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.

≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete

titles.

≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded

title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (> 21).

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.

≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.

Enter Title Name

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can give names to recorded titles.

(> 50, Entering text)

≥[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.

Partial Delete

[HDD] [RAM]

(> below, For your reference)

You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.

1 Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the

section you want to delete.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

Change Thumbnail

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

(> below, For your reference)

You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title

View.

1 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.

2 Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a

thumbnail is shown.

To change the thumbnail

Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at

the point you want to change.

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

Divide Title

[HDD] [RAM]

(> below, For your reference)

You can divide a title into two.

1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].

To confirm the division point

Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays

10 seconds before and after the division point.)

To change the division point

Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the

title.

≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (> 85) of the original title.

≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.

≥[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.

Chapter operations

Properties

No.

Channel

Date

026

ARD

10.10.2011

Time

Rec time

12:19

0:30 (SP)MON

Dinosaur

Approved for children older than 16 years.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Tit

ARD 10.10. FRI ARD 11.10.

007 008

HDD

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete

Start

Finish

0:43.21

PLAY

008

End

- -:- -.- - - -:- -.- -

Start End

HDD

VIDEO

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Change Thumbnail

Change

Finish

0:00.00

- -:- -.- -

Change

HDD



008

ENTER

Start play and select the image

of a thumbnail.

VIDEO

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title

Preview

Finish

0:43.21

PLAY

008

Divide

HDD

VIDEO

Note

Delete Chapter

[HDD] [RAM]

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.

≥Select “Combine Chapters” (> below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.

(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)

Create Chapter

[HDD] [RAM]

(> below, For your reference)

Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the

title.

1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.

≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

Combine Chapters

[HDD] [RAM]

Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].

≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.

For your reference

≥Use Search (> 33), Time Slip (> 33) to find the desired point.

≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (> 33) and Frame-by-frame (> 33).

≥To skip to the start or end of a title/chapter, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter

Create

Finish

0:43.21

PLAY

008

HDD

VIDEO

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 43 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Video)

[HDD] [RAM]

≥The maximum number of items on a disc:

– Playlists (Video): 99

– Chapters in Playlists (Video): Approx. 1000

(Depends on the state of recording.)

≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the

items entered will not be recorded.

[HDD] [RAM]

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connection to this unit.

≥Turn the unit on.

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded

title to be edited.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> 62, Setting the protection).

≥Playlists (Video) must be made in accordance with the encoding

system currently selected in “TV System” (> 69).

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

press [OK].

[HDD]

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to

select “VIDEO”.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”

and press [OK].

5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title

and press [4].

≥Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to

step 7.

6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you

want to add to a Playlist (Video) and

press [OK].

Press [3] to cancel.

≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.

Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]

(> 43, Create Chapter).

7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to

insert the chapter and press [OK].

≥Press [3] to select other source titles.

≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.

8 Press [RETURN ].

All the selected scenes become the Playlist (Video).

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

You can arrange the chapters (> 42) to create a Playlist (Video).

Copying (> 51) a Playlist (Video) will create a title.

≥Playlists (Video) are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use

much capacity.

≥Editing chapters in a Playlist (Video) does not modify the source

titles and source chapters.

≥You cannot create or edit Playlists (Video) while recording or

copying.

Creating Playlists (Video)

Playlist

(Video)

Title Title

Chapter

Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

Chapter

RETURN

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

Others

Drive Select

FUNCTION MENU

Remain

30:00 SP

HDD

Playlists

Flexible Rec

HDD Management

Setup

View

Playlists Playlist View ( Video )

- -

Create

HDD

- -

- - - -

- -

PICTURE

VIDEO

Playlists Playlist View ( Video )

- -

Create

HDD

- -

- -- -

- -

PICTURE

VIDEO

Create

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

001

Source Title

Source Chapter

Chapters in Playlist

Page 001/001

002 003

---

---------

002

Playlists

Press RETURN to finish.

HDD

------

Page 001/001

RETURN

OPTION

---

VIDEO

Create

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

001

Source Title

Source Chapter

Chapters in Playlist

Page 001/001

002 003

---

------------

002

Playlists

Press RETURN to finish.

HDD

------

Page 001/001

RETURN

OPTION

VIDEO

Create

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

001

002 003

---

------------

Source Title

Source Chapter

Chapters in Playlist

001 002

HDD

------

Page 001/001

Playlists

Page 001/001

RETURN

VIDEO

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 44 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Editing

[HDD] [RAM]

[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

press [OK].

[HDD]

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to

select “VIDEO”.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

Playlist (Video).

To start play > Press [OK].

To edit > Step 5.

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 42)

5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and

press [OK].

e.g. [HDD]

∫ If you select “Chapter View”

6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

chapter.

To start play > Press [OK].

To edit > Step 7.

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 42)

7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

≥You can go back to Playlist View ( Video ).

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

After performing steps 1–5 (> left)

Multiple editing is possible.

[HDD] [RAM]

After performing steps 1–7 (> left)

≥Editing chapters in a Playlist (Video) does not modify the source

titles and source chapters.

Multiple editing is possible.

Editing and playing Playlists (Video)/

chapters

Create

- -- -

- -- -- -

12.10. SUN 0:30

HDD

Playlists Playlist View ( Video )

PICTURE

VIDEO

Playlist View ( Video )

screen

Copy

Enter Name

Change Thumbnail

Create

Properties

Edit

Chapter View

PICTURE

Delete

Refer to “Playlist

(Video)

operations”.

(> right)

Playlists Chapter View

11 12.11. SUN 0:11

001

--- ---

--- ------ ---

002

HDD

0:19.36

0:10.24

VIDEO

Chapter View screen

Move Chapter

Create Chapter

Combine Chapters

Delete Chapter

Playlist View

Add Chapter

Refer to “Chapter

operations”. (> right)

Playlist (Video) operations

Delete

[HDD] [RAM]

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press

[OK].

Once deleted, the Playlists (Video) are

lost and cannot be restored.

Make certain before proceeding.

Properties

[HDD] [RAM]

[-RW‹VR›]

Playlist (Video) information (e.g., total time

and date) is shown.

≥Press [OK] to

exit the screen.

Create

[HDD] [RAM]

(> 44, Creating Playlists (Video), Step 5–8)

Copy

[HDD] [RAM]

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press

[OK].

≥The copied Playlist (Video) becomes the

newest one in “Playlist View ( Video )”

screen.

Enter

Name

[HDD] [RAM]

You can give names to Playlists (Video).

(> 50, Entering text)

Change

Thumbnail

[HDD] [RAM]

(> 43, Change Thumbnail)

Chapter operations

Add

Chapter

(> 44, Creating Playlists (Video), Step 5–7)

Move

Chapter

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position

to insert the chapter and press [OK].

Create

Chapter

(> 43, Create Chapter)

Combine

Chapters

(> 43, Combine Chapters)

Delete

Chapter

(> 43, Delete Chapter)

The Playlist (Video) itself is deleted if you

delete all the chapters in it.

Properties

Dinosaur

No.

Chapters 0:30.53

Date

Total

002

11.10.2011 TUE

Playlists Move Chapter

Previous Page 01/01 Next

11 12.11. SUN 0:11

001

--- ---

--- ------ ---

002

HDD

0:10.240:10.24

0:19.36

VIDEO

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 45 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Editing still pictures and music

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] (JPEG)

≥You can edit pictures and albums.

≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-

RW and USB memory.

≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalised DVD-R.

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> 62, Setting the protection).

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the

“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

2 Editing an album:

Select the album to be edited and

press [OPTION].

≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,

press [OPTION] without selecting album.

Editing a still picture:

3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

∫ To edit the album

(e.g., [HDD])

∫ To edit still picture

(e.g., [HDD])

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

After performing steps 1–3 (> left)

Multiple editing is possible.

[Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is

displayed]

Editing still pictures (JPEG)

1 Select the album which contains the still

picture to edit and press [OK].

2 Select the still pictures to edit and press

[OPTION].

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press

[OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)

A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

To select all albums

Press [∫]. After confirmation message appears, press

[2, 1] to select “Yes”.

Slideshow Settings

Add Pictures

Create Album

Edit Album

Copy to DVD

VIDEO/MUSIC

Playlist View

Start Slideshow

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Delete Album

Start Slideshow/Slideshow Settings

(> 37, 38)

Album (still picture)

and picture

operation (@ right)

Switch to Playlists (Picture) (> 48)

Properties

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Album View

Delete Pictures

Album (still picture) and picture

operation (> right)

You can go back to Album View.

Album (still picture) and picture operation

Delete

Pictures

Delete

Album

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] (JPEG)

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are

lost and cannot be restored. Make certain

before proceeding.

≥When deleting an album, files other than the

still picture files inside the album will also be

deleted. (This does not apply to folders under

the album concerned.)

≥[-R] Available space does not increase even

after pictures are deleted.

Change

Date

[HDD] [RAM]

You can change the date of the picture.

1 Press [2, 1] to select the item and press

[3, 4] to change.

2 Press [OK].

Enter

Album

Name

[HDD] [RAM]

You can give names to albums.

(> 50, Entering text)

≥Album names input using this unit may not be

displayed on other equipment.

Set up

Protection

Cancel

Protection

[HDD] [RAM]

If set, this will protect the

still picture or album from

accidental deletion.

Press [2, 1] to

select “Yes” and

press [OK].

The lock symbol appears

when the still picture or album is protected.

≥Even if the protection setting is used by this

unit to protect an album, the album may be

deleted by another unit.

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [-R]

[-R]DL] [CD]

[USB]

Information (e.g., image size and file size) is

shown.

≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

Add

Pictures

Create

Album

[HDD] [RAM]

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes”

and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album

that contains the still picture you want to

add and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press

[OK].

≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:

Select the still picture you want to add and

press [OK].

≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected:

All the still pictures in the album will be

copied.

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and

press [OK].

≥If you want to continue copying, select

“Yes” and go to step 2.

Only for “Create Album”

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and

press [OK].

≥If “Yes” is selected:

You can give names to albums. (> 50,

Entering text)

≥If “No” is selected:

The album name is automatically given.

Copy to

DVD

[HDD]

Copy to

HDD

[RAM]

For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD

Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

For copy to DVD-R

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &

Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press

[OK].

≥[-R]

Use blank discs or unfinalised discs on

which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR P

0001

Album Name

103

0002

0005 0006

HDD

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 46 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Editing

≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,

“Copy to DVD”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create Album”.

≥[RAM]

“Add Pictures” is available only for the folders conforming to DCF.

≥If you want to delete sample pictures, perform “Cancel Protection”

and then delete them. (> 46)

≥“Sample Music” is not displayed on the MUSIC screen.

[HDD]

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to

select “MUSIC”.

2 Editing an album:

Press [3, 4] to select the album and

press [OPTION].

Editing a track:

3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

∫ To edit the album (Music)

> below

∫ To edit the track (Music)

Useful functions during music play (> 35)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

≥When the timer recording starts, editing music stops on the way.

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] (JPEG)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture” or

“Music”.

≥[RAM] [-R] (JPEG) “Music” is not displayed.

4 Press [OK].

5 Deleting an album

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item

and press [DELETE ¢].

Deleting a still picture or track

You can confirm the item that you have selected using the

option menu.

≥Refer to option menu operations

6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

The item is deleted.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Editing music

1 Press [3, 4] to select the album and press

[OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and press

[OPTION].

Album and track operation

After performing steps 1-3 (> above)

Delete Album

Delete Track

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents

are lost and cannot be restored. Make

certain before proceeding.

Enter Album Name

Enter Track Name

You can give names to albums and tracks.

(> 50, Entering text)

Enter Artist Name You can edit the artist name of the track.

(> 50, Entering text)

Note

Enter Album Name

Repeat Play Setting

Sort

VIDEO/PICTURE

Track View

Delete Album

≥Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to

play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 34)

≥Playing still pictures (> 37)

Album and track operation (> below)

Useful functions during music play (> 35)

Properties

Enter Track Name

Repeat Play Setting

Album View

Enter Artist Name

Delete Track

You can go back to Album View

Album and track operation (> below)

Note

Deleting still pictures and music using

DELETE Navigator

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album

which contains the still picture or track to

delete and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture

or track and press [OK].

– for Still pictures > 46, step 3

– for Music @ left, step 3

To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still

picture only]

Press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture

only]

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)

A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 47 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Picture)

≥The maximum number of Playlists (Picture):

– Playlists: 99

– Pictures in a Playlist (Picture): Approx. 3000

[HDD]

You can create Playlists (Picture) with Background Music.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

press [OK].

When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to

select “PICTURE”.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”

and press [OK].

Press [

] to select an album (a folder)

in “Source Albums” and press [

≥Press [OK] to select all still pictures in the album, then skip

to step 8.

≥Press [3] to cancel.

6 Press [2, 1] to select the still picture

you want to add to a Playlist (Picture)

and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

7 Press [OK].

8 Press [2, 1] to select the position to

insert the still picture and press [OK].

≥Press [3] to select other “Source Albums” and repeat steps

5–8 to add pictures in other albums.

9 Press [RETURN ].

10 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” if you

want to name the Playlist (Picture).

11 Select the Background Music if you

want to change Background Music.

≥If “No” is selected, Sample Music is set for Background

Music.

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of Background

Music and press [OK].

≥“Sample Music” is Background Music pre-installed on

HDD.

3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for Background Music

and press [OK] when selecting other than “Sample Music”.

≥Background Music on Playlists (Picture) is specified for

each Playlist (Picture). (> 49)

All the selected pictures become a Playlist (Picture).

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

You can arrange favourite still pictures in albums stored on HDD

to create a Playlist (Picture).

Copying (> 56) a Playlist (Picture) will create an album.

(Background Music cannot be copied.)

≥Playlists (Picture) are not recorded separately so this doesn’t

use much capacity.

≥Editing still pictures in a Playlist (Picture) does not modify the

source albums or source still pictures.

≥You cannot create or edit Playlists (Picture) while recording or

copying.

Creating Playlists (Picture)

Still picture Still picture Still picture Still picture Still picture

Album 1 Album 2

Playlist (Picture)

Still picture Still picture Still picture

RETURN

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

Others

Drive Select

FUNCTION MENU

Remain

30:00 SP

HDD

Playlists

Flexible Rec

HDD Management

Setup

View

Playlists Playlist View ( Picture )

- -

HDD

- - - -

PICTURE

VIDEO

Playlists Playlist View ( Picture )

- -

Create

HDD

- -

- - - -

- -

PICTURE

VIDEO

Create

001 Date :25.5.2009

Source Albums

Source Pictures

Pictures in Playlist

Page 001/001

----

--------

----

002

Playlists

Press RETURN to finish.

HDD

Page 001/001

RETURN

----

------

001

0001

0002 0003

PICTURE

(> 50, Entering text)

Create

001 Date :25.5.2009

Source Albums

Source Pictures

Pictures in Playlist

Page 001/001

----

------------

002

Playlists

Press RETURN to finish.

HDD

Page 001/001

RETURN

OPTION

----

View

------

001

0001

0002 0003

PICTURE

Create

001 Date :25.5.2009

Source Albums

Source Pictures

Pictures in Playlist

Page 001/001

----

--------

----

002

Playlists

HDD

Page 001/001

RETURN

----

------

001

0001

0002

0003

PICTURE

Create

Yes

Input playlist name ?

RETURN

SELECT

Create

Yes

Sample music is now selected.

Change background music?

RETURN

SELECT

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 48 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Editing

[HDD]

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

press [OK].

≥When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button

to select “PICTURE”.

4 Editing a Playlist (Picture):

Select the Playlist (Picture) to be

edited and press [OPTION].

Editing a still picture:

5 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

∫ To edit the Playlist (Picture)

∫ To edit still picture

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

[HDD]

≥After performing steps 1–5 (@ left)

Multiple editing is possible.

[HDD]

≥After performing steps 1–5 (@ left)

Multiple editing is possible.

Editing Playlists (Picture)/still pictures

1 Select the Playlist (Picture) which contains

still pictures to edit and press [OK].

2 Select the still pictures to edit and press

[OPTION].

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and

press [OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)

A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

Slideshow Settings

Delete

Edit

Copy to DVD

VIDEO

Album View

Start Slideshow

Copy

Enter Playlist Name

Create

Playlist (Picture)

operations (@ right)

right

Album (still picture) and picture

operation (> 46)

Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Video) (> 44)

Properties

Add Pictures

Move Pictures

Delete Pictures

Playlist View

Still picture operations (@ right)

You can go back to

Playlist View ( Picture ).

Playlist (Picture) operations

Start

Slideshow

(> 37, Start Slideshow, Steps 1-2)

≥You cannot select multiple Playlists

(Picture) or all Playlists (Picture).

Slideshow

Settings

(> 38, Slideshow Settings)

≥Slideshow Settings are retained only for

the specified Playlist (Picture).

≥Music CD (CD-DA) is used for Background

Music when inserting Music CD.

Delete

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press

[OK].

Once deleted, the Playlists (Picture) are

lost and cannot be restored.

Make certain before proceeding.

Copy to

DVD

For copy to DVD-RAM

Press [2, 1] to select “Start”

and press [OK].

For copy to DVD-R

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &

Finalise” or “Copy Only” and

press [OK].

≥[-R]

Use blank discs or unfinalized discs on

which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.

Create

(> 48, Creating Playlists (Picture), Step 5–

11)

Copy

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press

[OK].

≥The copied Playlist (Picture) becomes the

newest one in “Playlist View ( Picture )”

screen.

Enter

Playlist

Name

You can give names to Playlists (Picture).

(> 50, Entering text)

Still picture operations

Properties

(> 46, Album (still picture) and picture

operation)

Add

Pictures

(> 48, Creating Playlists (Picture), Step 5–9)

Move

Pictures

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position

to insert the picture and press [OK].

Delete

Pictures

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”

and press [OK].

Playlists Move Pictures

Previous Page 001/001 Next

Playlist Name

Playlist 01

---- ----

---- -------- ---

HDD

RETURN

PICTURE

0:10.24

0001

0002

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 49 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Entering text

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can give names to recorded titles, etc.

Also, you can search desired programmes on TV Guide by entering

key words. (Free Word Search/Find Titles) (> 29)

1 Show Enter Title Name screen etc.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a

character and press [OK].

Repeat this step to enter other characters.

≥To delete a character

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field

and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)

≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters

e.g., entering the letter “R”

1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.

2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.

3 Press [OK].

≥To enter a space

Press [DELETE ¢] and press

[OK].

3 Press [∫] (Set).

To end partway

Press [RETURN ].

Text is not added.

For your reference

If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu

after finalisation (> 63). When entering a title name, the name that

will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu

Preview” window.

≥If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.

≥The number of characters that can be entered depends on what

kind of things you name.

Title (timer recording)

Select “Programme Name”. (> 27, Manually programming

timer recordings, step 3)

Free Word Search

Select “Free Word Search”. (> 29, “Searching by entering

words”, step 2)

Find Titles

Select “Find Titles”. (> 29, “Searching using programme

information of titles recorded to the HDD”, step 5)

Title

Select “Enter Title Name”. (> 42, step 4)

Playlist (Video)

Select “Enter Name”. (> 45, step 5)

Playlist (Picture)

Select “Enter Playlist Name”. (> 49, step 5)

Album of still pictures

Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 46, Editing still pictures

(JPEG), step 3)

Album (CD/MP3) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 47, Editing music, step 3)

Track (CD/MP3) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Track Name”. (> 47, Editing music, step 3)

Artist (CD/MP3) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Artist Name”. (> 47, Editing music, step 3)

Disc

Select “Disc Name”. (> 62, Providing a name for a disc,

step 1)

Favourite 1–4

Press the “Red” button. (> 64, To change the name of a

Favourite in the “Favourite” column, step 2)

Enter Title Name

12345

ABC a

DEF d

GH I

JKL j

67890

bc

ef / %

hi $

kl@

n ]

Space

Add to List

Delete

PQRSp

TUV t

WX Y Zw

qrs( )

uv{ }

xyz

;



Name List

Set

Top Menu Preview

RETURN

Standard Characters Other Characters

SELECT







£¤¥

«¬

µ¶ ·

¿Á

ÔÕÖ

ÉÊË

¦§¨©ª

¯°± ²

¹º»¼½

ÃÄ

ÍÎÏ

× Ú

ØÙ

Space

ÝÞß

áà

çèé

ñòóôõ

âãäåæ

ëìí î

ö÷ø ú

þý

Name field: shows the text you have entered

Press the “Red” button or

“Green” button to select

character type and press

[OK].

“Standard Characters”:

(> left, Alphabet characters,

etc.)

“Other Characters”:

(> below, Umlaut characters,

accented characters, etc.)

∫ To add a name to the list

You can add frequently used names and recall them later.

Maximum number of added names: 20

Maximum number of characters per name: 44

After entering the name (steps 1-2).

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [OK].

≥Press [RETURN ] to cancel.

∫ To recall an added name

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and

press [OK].

∫ To delete an added name

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.

3 Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name” and press [OK].

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

5 Press [RETURN ].

N O

P Q R

TUV

Enter Title Name

1 2 3 4 5

A B C a

D E F d

G H I g

6 7 8 9 0

b c  

e f /  %

h i  $

Top Menu Preview

Standard Characters Other Characters

Chapter 1_

Chapter 1

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 50 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Copying

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

Copying

§1

To high speed copy titles (or Playlists (Video) created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD

(The default setting is “On”. > 67).

However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.

≥

When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with high-speed copy.

≥Playlists (Video) created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.

≥Playlists (Video) mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby

Digital and LPCM, etc.).

≥Titles that contain many deleted segments.

≥Titles that have been copied to the HDD from a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD (SD Video).

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed )

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

§2

If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent

against degradation of picture quality.)

[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

§3

You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.

If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (

§4

You cannot copy Playlists (Video) with a play time more than 8 hours.

When you copy a Playlist (Video), it will become a title in the destination drive.

§5

[RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.

[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5 minutes [+R] about 8 minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.

§6

Thumbnails return to the default position.

§7

When copying Playlists (Video), the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.

§8

Possible only with titles on the HDD

(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation.)

– You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.

– You cannot play a Playlist (Video) while copying titles with copyright protection (> 22).

– Still pictures or music cannot be played.

∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)

(excludes time required to write data management information)

≥

The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying 1 hour title from HDD to each disc in the above list supporting High-Speed

copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area on where information is written or unique feature on the disc.

§1

In this unit, copying with 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as 12X Speed DVD-R disc takes.

§2

In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, take.

§3

In this unit, copying with 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as 4X Speed DVD-RW disc takes.

§4

In this unit, copying with 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as 8X Speed +R disc takes.

≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.

≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] Advanced Copy

Features Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult

settings.

Make a copy list and then copy.

You can set the unit to copy titles or Playlists (Video)

in the way you want.

Copy direction HDD > DVD ≤ ≤

DVD > HDD – ≤

[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]

[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)

High speed mode copy

§1

≤ ≤

[DVD-V]

You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.

[+RW]

You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.

Changing recording mode –

≤

§2

Finalise

§3

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Automatically finalised

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Can be selected

High speed mode Normal speed mode High speed mode Normal speed mode

Copying Playlists (Video)

§4

––≤ ≤

Are chapters maintained? ≤

–

§5

≤

–

§5

Are thumbnails maintained? ≤

–

§6

≤

§7

–

§6

Recording or Playing while Copying

––

≤

§8

–

Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer) and +R DL

(single-sided, Double Layer)

When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal

speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL.

The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.

You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.

– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new

blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent

of up to 4 hours of free space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)

– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to

be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total.

When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may

momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 22)

Regarding copying of copyright-protected titles

You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (> 85) compatible

DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.

≥Titles or Playlists (Video) cannot be copied from DVD-

RAM to the HDD.

≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (> 43).

≥You cannot copy Playlists (Video) created from copyright-

protected titles.

≥Titles with recording limitations and Playlists (Video)

cannot be registered on the same copying list.

Recording

Mode

Recorded

1 hour

EP(6 hours)

EP(8 hours)

Required

time

12 min. 5x

6 min. 10x

3 min. 20x

2 min. 30x

1 min. 30 s.

40x

Speed

Required

time

Speed

Required

time

Speed

Required

time

Speed

Required

time

Speed

Required

time

Speed

Required

time

Speed

5X Speed

DVD-RAM

HDD

5 min. 46 s.

10x

2 min. 30 s.

24x

1 min. 21 s.

44x

58 s. 62x

48 s. 75x

15 min.

7 min. 30 s.

3 min. 45 s.

16x

2 min. 30 s.

24x

1 min. 53 s.

32x

15 min.

7 min. 30 s.

3 min. 45 s.

16x

8 min. 20 s.

3 min. 45 s.

16x

1 min. 53 s.

32x

15 min.

7 min. 30 s.

3 min. 45 s.

16x

15 min.

7 min. 30 s.

3 min. 45 s.

16x

2 min. 30 s.

24x

1 min. 57 s.

31x

12X Speed

DVD-R

4X Speed

DVD-R DL

4X Speed

DVD-RW

8X Speed

4X Speed

+R DL

4X Speed

+RW

Note

Editing

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 51 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

When copying a title with main and secondary audio

(Analogue broadcast only)

≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from

“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 68) when:

– Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL and +RW.

– When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 68)

and you are copying in XP mode.

∫ Speed and recording mode when copying

[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed

[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following

table.

In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to

“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”

or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.

≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for

Recording” (> 67) do not match.

≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:

– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR

(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

≥If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen

appears when copying. Press the numbered buttons to enter your

4-digit PIN and press [OK].

Parental control information of the title is not copied to discs.

≥Titles and Playlists (Video) recorded using a different encoding

system (PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on

the unit cannot be copied.

≥[-R] Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures (JPEG)

already recorded on it.

≥[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video

already recorded on it.

Preparation

≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (> 12, 15).

≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.

[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)

When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.

(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,

copy will not be performed.)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video (HDD to

DVD)” and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the title you

want to copy and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

5 Press [OK].

6 After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-

only and you can no longer record or edit.

Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

Copy starts.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

∫ To stop copying (> 53)

∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and

functions (> 54)

∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY

Navigator

1Press [3, 4] to select the title and press

[OPTION].

2Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”

and press [OK].

Properties:

The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are

shown.

Sort (All Titles screen only):

Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to

display titles by No., channel, recording date, day, recording start

time and title name. (You cannot select this item if a title has a check

mark.)

If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is

cancelled.

≥When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording

compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the

sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.

If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )”

in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 67).

≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title

at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.

To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and

then copy the contents of the list (> 53).

Before copying

Rec for High Speed Copy (> 67) Copy speed

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High

Speed Copy” set to “On”.

High speed

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High

Speed Copy” set to “Off”.

Normal speed

When making a copy of multiple titles that

were recorded with “Rec for High Speed

Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]

DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL

are automatically finalised (> 85). After finalising, the discs

become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD

equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

Note

COPY Navigator

Page 01/01

HDD

001

ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30

ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25

AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10

ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05

AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00

ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15

ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30

002

003

004

005

006

007

---

Title NameTime No.

Channel

Date Day

008

ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00

RETURN

Rec time

0:52(SP)

Disc Space: 4310MB All Titles

Total Size: 0MB( 0%)

Total : 0

Select

Info

OPTION

To show other pages

Press [:, 9] to show other pages.

COPY Navigator

Page 01/01

HDD

001

ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30

ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25

AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10

ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05

AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00

ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15

ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30

002

003

004

005

006

007

---

Title NameTime No.

Channel

Date Day

008

ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00

RETURN

OPTION

Rec time

0:52(SP)

Disc Space: 4310MB

Total Size: 0MB( 0%)

Total : 0

Sort

Grouped Titles

Properties

All Titles

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 52 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Copying

[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW] > [HDD]

You can order titles and Playlists (Video) as desired for copy to disc.

See also “Before copying” (> 52).

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced

Copy” and press [OK].

≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]

several times (> step 7).

4 Set the copy direction.

≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[4] (> step 5).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].

4 Press [2] to confirm.

5 Set the recording mode.

≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

[4] (> step 6).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].

5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].

6 Press [2] to confirm.

6 Register titles and Playlists (Video) for

copy.

≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (> step 7).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the

“Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or Playlist (Video)

and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select

all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at

a time.

≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,

the check mark is cancelled.

≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “ ” or

“ ” can be registered.

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “ ” can be

registered.

≥To show other pages (> below)

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 54)

You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (> 54)

exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity:” is not sufficient).

6 Press [2] to confirm.

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed

recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or

+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than

normal.

If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal

( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup

menu (> 67).

8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &

Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press

[OK].

≥If “Copy & Finalise” is selected

After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also

play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no

longer record or edit.

Copying using the copying list–

Advanced Copy

Copy

HDD

DVD

Source

Destination

Cancel All

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Create List

Start Copying

HDD DVD

VIDEO High Speed

Select the copy direction.

RETURN

Page 01/01

Copy

Create copy list.

Size: 0MB

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

New item (Total=0)

Cancel All

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Create List

Start Copying

HDD DVD

VIDEO High Speed

Name of item

( 0%)

RETURN

OPTION

HDD

Create List All Titles

007

ARD 10.10. FRI

008 0:30(XP)

ARD 11.10. SAT

- - -

- - - - - - - - -

Playlists

VIDEO

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

∫ To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

(You cannot stop while finalising)

When High-speed copying

All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are

copied.

When Normal Speed copying

Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with

point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled

before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the

HDD.

≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while

temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.

However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to

disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point

cancelled are copied.

Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining

writable disc space becomes less.

∫ To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

∫ Recording and playing while copying

You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.

(Only when high speed copying without finalising)

≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.

Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.

≥To confirm the current progress

Press [STATUS ].

≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the

HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.

(Only when high speed copying without finalising)

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 53 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6–5 (> 53)

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list.

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or Playlist (Video) and

press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Move:

Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.

Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying setting and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (> 53)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the

copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

[DVD-V] > [HDD]

You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.

While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD

according to the set time.

≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that

portion of title is not recorded.

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 67) is set to “On” and you

make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected

in “Aspect for Recording” (> 67) of the Setup menu.

Preparation

≥Insert the finalised disc (> 15).

After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-

ideo”) (> 53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)

1 Set “Copy Time”.

≥If you are not going to change the setting (> step 2).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].

≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].

4 Press [2] to confirm.

Copy will continue until there is not enough available

recording space on the HDD.

≥Setting the unit to copy according to the set time

3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].

5 Press [2, 1] to select “hour” and “min.” and press

[3, 4] to set the recording time.

6 Press [OK].

7 Press [2] to confirm.

Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after the

content being played finishes.

≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to

include the operation time before play begins.

≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered

buttons.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

The disc top menu is displayed.

≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is

selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising

the disc (> 63).

COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions

Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in

high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW

Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in

high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)

(However, titles and Playlists (Video) cannot be

copied in high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)

[+R]DL] is displayed, but copy cannot be

performed.

Title with copyright protection (> 22, Copyright-

protected TV programmes)

Titles deleted from the HDD by copyright protection

after copying. (> 22, Copyright-protected TV

programmes)

Titles or Playlist (Video) contains still picture(s)

≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.

Titles or Playlists (Video) that are restricted from

viewing or copying by Child Lock function ([HDD]

only) (> 66)

(NTSC)

(PAL)

Title or Playlist (Video) recorded using a different

encoding system from that of the TV system

currently selected on the unit.

≥Titles and Playlists (Video) displaying these marks

cannot be selected.

Data size of each registered item

Size:

Data size recorded to the copy destination

≥When copying at normal speed, the total

data size will change according to the

recording mode.

≥The total data size shown may be larger

than the sum of the data sizes for each

registered item, because of data

management information being written to

the copy destination, etc.

To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and

+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

Size: 0MB

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

New item (Total=0)

(0%)

No. Size

Name of item

Add

Delete

Move

Delete All

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and

+R DL

≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also

recorded.

≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent

illegal copying, and cannot be copied.

≥The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.

Copy

min.

Press OK to change the setting.

hour

Cancel All

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Copy Time

Start Copying

DVD HDD

DVD-Video XP

RETURN

Set the time a few minutes

longer.

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 54 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Copying

4 When the top menu is displayed

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title

you want to start copying, and press

[OK].

While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are

recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has

finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is

reached.)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To stop copying

Press [∫].

You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop

copying.

≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.

≥The screen on the right is recorded at the

beginning.

≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of

copy to the end.

≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top

menu does not display automatically, press

[1] (PLAY) to start.

≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original

picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.

≥If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video

Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (> 53,

Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy).

Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been

taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be

copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.

(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)

≥You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.

You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.

≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.

My favorite 01/02

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3 Chapter 4

Note

Copying Video (MPEG2) from a video

equipment

Preparation

1 Turn on both this unit and the camera.

2 Connect the camera to this unit with USB cable.

3 Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for

data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.

≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.

The display automatically appears when you connect the camera

to this unit. (> 36)

Press [3, 4] to select “Video ( MPEG2 )” and press [OK].

Then go to step 7 on page 53.

≥SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the copy

list.

≥If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Video ( MPEG2 )” is not

displayed.

HDD

DVD-RAM

VIDEO

DVD Video Recording format

USB Cable

Video (MPEG2)

USB device

Video ( MPEG2 )

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 55 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Copying still pictures/Playlist (Picture)

≥

You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/CD-RW.

≥When you copy a Playlist (Picture), it will become an album in the

destination drive.

[USB] > [HDD]

This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if

still pictures are imported from the same USB memory, then only

new still pictures will be imported.

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory. (> 15)

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 36)

2 Press [3, 4] to select

“Picture ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy New

Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

≥This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and

USB memories for USB device. If additional still pictures are

imported, then the older information will be deleted.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will

stop partway through.

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

≥Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the

shooting date in the HDD.

≥Only DCF-compliant USB media can be used for this function.

[HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]

[RAM] >[HDD] [RAM]

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced

Copy” and press [OK].

≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]

several times (@ step 7).

4 Set the copy direction.

≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[4] (> step 5).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].

5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].

The same drive as the copy source can be selected.

6 Press [2] to confirm.

5 Set the copy mode.

≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

[4] (> step 6).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].

“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.

4 Press [2] to confirm.

6 Register still pictures for copy.

≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (> step 7).

You can register still pictures, still picture folders or Playlists

(Picture).

≥Individual still pictures and folders/Playlists (Picture) cannot

be registered on the same list.

∫ To register individual still pictures

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

3 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]

Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”

Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press

[;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select

all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

≥

The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you

want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

≥When you switch between the “PICTURE” and “Playlists”

tab, the check mark is cancelled.

≥To show other pages (> 57)

≥To select another folder or Playlist (Picture) (> 57)

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 57)

6 Press [2] to confirm.

∫ To register on a folder by folder basis

(To register Playlists (Picture))

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

5 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]

Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

6 Press [3, 4] to select the folder or Playlist (Picture) and

press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select

all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at

a time.

≥To show other pages (> 57)

7 Press [OK].

8 Repeat steps 4–7 until you select all necessary folders

(Playlists (Picture)).

≥To edit the copying list (> 57)

9 Press [2] to confirm.

Copying new still pictures on the USB

memory—Copy New Pictures

Copying using the copying list

Copy New Pictures

Copy from

USB

Copy to

HDD

Note

Copy

DVD

HDD

Source

Destination

Cancel All

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Create List

DVD HDD

PICTURE

High Speed

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

Cancel All

Picture

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Create List

Picture/Folder

Start Copying

DVD HDD

PICTURE

High Speed

Name of item

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

New item (Total=0)

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

Cancel All

Picture

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Picture/Folder

DVD HDD

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 56 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Copying

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

≥Only when copying individual still pictures.

When specifying another folder as the copying destination,

select “Folder”.

8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

9 For copy to DVD-R

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &

Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press

[OK].

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy

list may not be the same at the copy destination.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will

stop partway through.

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

≥[-R] Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures (JPEG)

already recorded on it.

≥[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video

already recorded on it.

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6–5 (for a still picture) or 6–7

(for a folder or Playlist) (> 56)

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list.

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder and press

[;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Copying using the copying list)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a title, Playlist (Picture) or still picture has been recorded or

deleted at the copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

∫ To select another folder or Playlist (Picture)

After performing step 6–2 (> 56, To register individual still pictures)

1 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]

Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder or Playlists (Picture) and press

[OK].

You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.

≥Individual still pictures of different folders (Playlists (Picture))

cannot be registered on the same list.

≥It is convenient to create a Playlist (Picture) (> 48) if you want to

[USB] > [HDD]

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory (> 15).

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 36)

2 Press [3, 4] to select

“Picture ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All

Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

[USB] > [HDD] [RAM]

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory (> 15).

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 36)

2 Press [3, 4] to select

“Picture ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Selected

Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].

4 Perform steps 4 – 8 on “Copying

using the copying list” (> 56).

≥Another folder cannot be selected as the copying destination

on step 7.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

≥Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”.

≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same

at the copy destination.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will

stop partway through.

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

≥Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the

shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Folder

Make a new folder and dub ?

New folder

001 100__DVD

002 101__DVD

003 102__DVD

---

New folder

Note

Add

Delete

Delete All

Copying still pictures on the USB

memory

Copying all the still pictures

Copying using the copying list

Create List Picture ( JPEG )

001/001

Folder 103__DVD

---- ---- ----

RETURN

Page

0001

0002

HDD

0003

0004

----

--------

RETURN

Folder

Create List

Page 01/01

Picture 0012 File 0012

001 100 DVD

002 101__DVD

003 102__DVD

---

\JPEG\DCIM\101__DVD

---

004 103__DVD

Playlists Playlists

PICTURE PICTURE

OPTION

HDD

Copy All Pictures

Copy from

USB

Copy to

HDD

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 57 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Copying music to HDD

You can store the following formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.

≥Music CD (CD-DA)

≥MP3

You can copy MP3 files from the USB memory or CD-R/

CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL.

[CD] > [HDD]

All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.

(Cannot record track-by-track.)

≥One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.

≥Audio quality: LPCM

≥The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300

(Depends on the remaining capacity.)

If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that

can be recorded will be reduced.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”

and press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

Recording starts.

To stop recording

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

≥If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be

recorded.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer

recordings will not proceed.

≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc or

USB memory.

≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)

restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3) > [HDD]

You can copy MP3 files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/

DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.

≥One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.

≥The maximum number of albums

on HDD: 300

The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000

(Depends on the remaining capacity.)

If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums

that

can be recorded will be reduced.

Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be

treated as albums.

1 While stopped

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

Insert the CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/

DVD-R DL (> 15).

[USB]

Insert the USB memory (> 15).

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 36)

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music

( MP3 )” and press [OK].

“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to

“USB#HDD”, “DVD#HDD” or “CD#HDD” and “MUSIC High

Speed”, respectively.

3 Register MP3 files for copy.

You can register MP3 files or folders.

≥MP3 files and folders cannot be registered on the same list.

∫ To register individual MP3 files

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select

all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at

a time.

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 59)

6 Press [2] to confirm.

Copying music from a CD

RETURN

SELECT

Play Music

Copy Music

Copying music from a USB memory or

CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL

Note

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

Cancel All

Track

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Create List

Track/Folder

Start Copying

USB HDD

MUSIC

High Speed

Name of item

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

New item (Total = 0)

RETURN

OPTION

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 58 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Copying

∫ To register on a folder by folder basis

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track / Folder” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].

5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select

all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at

a time.

6 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> below)

7 Press [2] to confirm.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

≥For individual files only

When specifying an existing folder as the copying

destination

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].

When creating a new folder as the copying destination

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

2 Enter the folder name (> 50, Entering text).

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

≥The sequence in which the MP3 files are registered on the copy list

may not be the same at the copy destination.

≥If MP3 files are already contained inside the copy destination

folder, the new MP3 files are recorded following the existing MP3

files.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will

stop partway through.

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 3–5 (for a MP3 file)

(> 58, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/

CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL) or 3–6 (for a folder)

(@ above).

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press [OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list.

1 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file or folder and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all

necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1–2 (> 58, Copying music from a USB

memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

Cancel All

Track

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Track/Folder

USB HDD

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

Note

Add

Delete

Delete All

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 59 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Using on-screen menus/Status message

Setting menus

1 Press [DISPLAY].

≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,

etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you

cannot select or change.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and

press [1].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and

press [1].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.

≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].

To clear the on-screen menus

Press [DISPLAY].

With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using

the menus (> 18) on the disc.

≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot

change when there is no recording.

Audio attribute

Language

This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.

Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that

can be selected will differ.

Using on-screen menus

Common procedures

Disc menu—Setting the disc content

PBC (Playback control > 85) [VCD]

Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.

Soundtrack

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

The disc’s audio attributes appear.

[DVD-V]

Select the audio and language (> right, Audio attribute,

Language).

[VCD] (SVCD)

Select the soundtrack number.

≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one

audio type.

Subtitles

[DVD-V]

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> right,

Language).

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only

discs that contain subtitle on/off information)

Turn the subtitle on/off.

≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.

[VCD] (SVCD)

Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number.

≥“Text” or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not

multiple subtitles.

Angle

[DVD-V]

Change the number to select an angle.

Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

(> 33, Changing audio during play)

Disc

Play

Picture

Sound

Soundtrack

Subtitles

Audio channel

Off

L R

Digital 2/0 ch

Other

Menu Item Setting

Signal type

k (kHz):

b (bit):

ch (channel):

Sampling frequency

Number of bits

Number of channels

ENG:

FRA:

DEU:

ITA:

ESP:

NLD:

SVE:

NOR:

English

French

German

Italian

Spanish

Dutch

Swedish

Norwegian

DAN:

POR:

RUS:

JPN:

CHI:

KOR:

MAL:

VIE:

Danish

Portuguese

Russian

Japanese

Chinese

Korean

Malay

Vietnamese

THA:

POL:

CES:

SLK:

HUN:

FIN:

¢:

Thai

Polish

Czech

Slovak

Hungarian

Finnish

Others

Play menu—Change the play sequence

Repeat Play

≥All [CD] [VCD]

≥Chapter [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]

≥Group MP3 (except [USB])

≥

(Playlist (Video))

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]

≥Title [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]

≥Track [CD] [VCD] and MP3 (except [USB])

Select “Off” to cancel.

Picture menu—Change the picture quality

Playback NR

Reduces noise and picture degradation while playing.

≥On:

Reduces noise and picture degradation.

≥Off:

Video is played back as it is.

Input NR (Only when AV1, AV2 or AV3 is selected)

Reduces the noise while recording (Except analogue

channels).

≥Automatic:

Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video

tape.

≥On:

Noise reduction works for input video.

≥Off:

Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.

Sound menu—Change the DVB multi audio and

sound effect

DVB Multi Audio

[Digital channel only]

If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the

desired channel before recording.

≥DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or

recording.

≥Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be

selected will differ.

≥English

≥Italian

≥Polish

≥Original

≥German

≥Spanish

≥Czech

≥French

≥Russian

≥Turkish

“Original” is displayed when the original language is

available in a broadcast.

Dialogue Enhancer

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]

[-RW‹VR›]

(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre

channel)

The volume of the centre channel is raised to make

dialogue easier to hear.

LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 60 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Setting menus

Press [STATUS ].

The display changes each time you press the button.

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD

Management” or “DVD Management”

and press [OK].

e.g., [RAM]

≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and

“Format HDD” are displayed.

Other menu—Change the DVB subtitle and display

position

DVB Subtitles

[Digital channel only]

You can set the desired subtitles if more than one subtitle track

can be selected.

≥DVB Subtitles cannot be selected during playback or

recording.

≥Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected

will differ.

≥English

≥Italian

≥Polish

≥Original

≥German

≥Spanish

≥Czech

≥French

≥Russian

≥Turkish

“Original” is displayed when the original language is

available in a broadcast.

Position

1–5:

The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.

Status messages

13:50 XP

18:53:50 11.10.

 T1 0:05.14 XP  T2 0:00.10 XP

Remain



Play 15:05:13

Live 15:10:46

REC

PLAY

1 DVB

ABC

L R

Copying 10%

HDD

Selected drive status/type of disc or USB

memory

Channel information

Recording or play status/input channel

Selected audio type

Available recording time and

recording mode

Title number and elapsed time during play/

Recording mode

Date and time

No display

Recording drive/Copy progress indicator

Title number and elapsed time during recording/

Recording mode

The remaining time appears here while stopped.

Current time

≥When using Pause Live TV

The time when the picture currently displayed on the

television was broadcasted

HDD and disc management

Common procedures

RETURN

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

Others

Drive Select

FUNCTION MENU

Remain

30:00 SP

HDD

Playlists

Flexible Rec

HDD Management

Setup

View

DVD

Management

DVD-RAM

Titles 11

Used

Remain

0 : 22

5:38 (EP)

Off

Disc Name

Delete all titles

Format Disc

Disc Protection

RETURN

SELECT

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 61 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

HDD and disc management

[RAM]

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc

Protection” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-

protected.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

[HDD] [RAM]

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> above).

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all

titles” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when finished.

4 Press [OK].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be

restored. Make certain before proceeding.

≥Deleting all video titles will result in all Playlists (Video) also being

deleted.

≥Still picture data (JPEG), Playlists (Picture), music data or

computer data cannot be deleted.

≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can provide a name for each disc.

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

≥[RAM] Release protection (> left, Setting the protection).

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”

and press [OK].

(> 50, Entering text)

≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is

displayed on the Top Menu.

≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other

equipment after creating top menu.

≥[-R] Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to record

still images to that disc.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”

or “Format Disc” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when formatting is finished.

≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may

take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.

This can render the disc unusable.

4 Press [OK].

≥When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be

possible to use it on any other equipment.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.

≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.

≥Sample pictures are restored when formatting HDD even if they

have been deleted.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Setting the protection

Deleting all titles and

Playlists (Video)—Delete all titles

DVD

Management

DVD-RAM

Titles 11

Used

Remain

0 : 22

5:38 (EP)

Disc Name

Delete all titles

Format Disc

Disc Protection

RETURN

SELECT

Note

Providing a name for a disc

Deleting all the contents—Format

Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),

and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before

proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc

even if you have set protection.

My favorite 01/02

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

DVD

Management

DVD-RAM

Titles 11

Used

Remain

0 : 22

5:38

(

Documentary

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 62 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Setting menus

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-

Video top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW]).

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”

and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

background and press [OK].

≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (> 43,

Change Thumbnail)

≥[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images

recorded on them.

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play

Select” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or

“Title 1” and press [OK].

≥[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images

recorded on them.

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> above)

before finalising the disc.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and

press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when finalising is finished.

≥You cannot cancel finalising.

≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.

([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.

This will render the disc unusable.

4 Press [OK].

When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take

longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately

four times).

≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s

equipment.

≥If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than

this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be

displayed.

≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players

due to the condition of the recording.

Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.

http://www.panasonic-europe.com

[+RW]

+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient

function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW

disc on other equipment.

You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.

Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> left)

before creating top menu.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top

Menu” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.

Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.

4 Press [OK].

≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the

created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such

cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Selecting the background style—Top

Selecting whether to show the Top

Menu first—Auto-Play Select

Top Menu: The top menu appears first.

Title 1: The disc content is played without displaying

the top menu.

Enabling discs to be played on other

equipment—Finalise

7 8

Top Menu List

Display after finalising

Title Name

Thumbnail

(Still picture)

Note

After finalising

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you

can no longer record or edit.

≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting

(> 62) although it becomes play-only after finalising.

≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.

≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] Chapters are created automatically

([-R] [-RW‹V›]: about 5-minute chapters/[+R]: about 8-minute

chapters), if

– the titles were directly recorded to the disc.

– the titles were copied using any mode other than the high

speed mode.

This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode

of recording.

≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters

during play.

Before

finalising

After

finalising

Recording/Editing/Entering name ≤ –

Play on other players – ≤

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 63 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Changing the unit’s settings

You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.

≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and

press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and

press [1].

5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and

press [OK].

6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and

press [OK].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

∫ Favourites Edit

You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing and

recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the

channel setting itself.

≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourite

during timer recording standby.

Press the “Green” button to select the Favourite.

≥The channels can be sorted in numerical or alphabetical order with

“Red” button.

[DVB-C] To add channels to a Favourite

1 Press the “Blue” button to select the Category.

≥Every time you press the button, you change between:

All Channels (Except for Analogue Channels) J TV J Radio J

Analogue (Only when receiving analogue broadcast signal) J

All Channels

2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the left column and press

the “Yellow” button.

≥Repeat this step to add other channels.

3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

[DVB-T] To add channels to a Favourite

1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All Channels” column

and press the “Yellow” button.

≥Repeat this step to add other channels.

≥Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the

Favourite. (This function is available only when no channels

have been added to the Favourite.)

2 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To change the order of channels of a Favourite

1 Press [1]

2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column to

move and press the “Green” button.

3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel and press

the “Green” button.

≥Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.

4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To delete channels on a Favourite

1 Press [1]

2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column and

press the “Yellow” button.

≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.

≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the

Favourite.

3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel

itself.

[DVB-C] You can still select the channel from the “All Channels” or

other categories (e.g. TV, Radio, etc.) after deleting channels

from a Favourite.

[DVB-T] You can still select the channel from the “All Channels”

after deleting channels from a Favourite.

To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite” column

1 Press [1]

2 Press the “Red” button.

(> 50, Entering text)

When the station name of the left column is highlighted

∫ Auto Setup Restart

You can restart auto channel setting if set up (> 8) fails for some

reason.

When the confirmation screen appears

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

You can also use the following method to restart Auto Setup.

When the unit is on and stopped

Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the

Language setting screen appears.

All the settings except for clock settings, remote control code, ratings

levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning

menu), etc. return to the factory preset. The timer recording

programmes are also cancelled.

Common procedures

Tuning

[DVB-C] (and analogue

broadcasts)

[DVB-T] (and analogue

broadcasts)

Tabs

Menus Options

Setup

Disc

Picture

Sound

Display

Tuning

Connection

Others

RETURN

TAB

SELECT

Remote Control

Clock

System Update

Initialize

DVD 1

TV Guide Type Digital

Standby Settings

Favourites Editor

RETURN

SELECT

Favourite Select

Sorting Mode CategoryAdd

Favourite 1

Page -

Page +

All Channels

1 Das Erste

2 ZDF

3 RTL Television

4 ABC

5 VOX

6 ProSieben

7 RTL2

8 kabel eins

9 Super RTL

123...

Favourites Editor

RETURN

SELECT

Favourite Select

Add AllAdd

All Channels

Favourite 1

Sorting Mode

1 ABC

2 ABC HDTV

3 RTL

4 Das Erste

123...

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 64 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Setting menus

∫ Settings for DVB-C Channels/

Settings for DVB-T Channels

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

[DVB-C] DVB Manual Tuning

You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could not

complete successfully.

1 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.

≥Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal

quality displays.

[Refer to “Signal Condition” (> right) for signal quality and

signal strength.]

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Symbol Rate” and enter Symbol Rate for

tuning with the numbered buttons if needed.

≥Normally set to “Auto”. (Default : “Auto”)

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Bandwidth” and press [2, 1] to select

“7 MHz” or “8 MHz”.

4 Press [OK] to start scan.

The set channel is displayed in the table.

5 Press [EXIT] and press [WXCH] to check that applicable

channels have been selected.

[DVB-T] DVB Manual Tuning

You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could not

complete successfully.

1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.

2 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.

≥Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal

quality displays.

[Refer to “Signal Condition” (> right) for signal quality and

signal strength.]

3 Press [OK] to start scan.

The set channel is displayed in the table.

4 Press [EXIT] and press [WXCH] to check that applicable

channels have been selected.

Add New DVB Channels

You can search for newly added digital channels to receive.

[DVB-C] Press [3, 4] to select “Quick Scan” or “Full Scan” and press

[OK].

The unit starts searching for newly available digital channels. This

takes about 20 minutes.

A message is displayed when the search is finished.

“No new DVB channels found.” is displayed when no new channels

can be found.

Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.

New Channel Message

Signal Condition

You can check the Signal Condition.

Press [WXCH] to select the channel.

When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be

selected:

1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.

2 Press [WXCH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the

unit’s display.

3 Display the Setup menu again (> 64).

Signal Quality

The quality of the signal is shown.

Below 2 (display red):

The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the

pictures and sound.

2–5 (display orange):

The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the

pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.

Over 5 (display green):

Optimum picture and sound quality.

Signal Strength

The strength of the signal is shown.

The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,

“10” means signal strength 100%.

If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.

Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.

≥When the signal is weak:

– adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the

Setup menu (> left).

– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly

broadcasting.

[DVB-C] Network Name

The network name which is stored in the transport stream list for the

current DVB service is displayed.

If there is no network name in it, “Unknown” is displayed.

[DVB-C] Parameter

The frequency and the symbol rate are displayed.

[DVB-C] DVB Advanced Setup

You can set up channels by entering “Home Frequency” and

“Network ID” obtained from your cable provider.

≥Digital timer recording programmes are cancelled and digital

tuning data are replaced by new ones.

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Home Frequency” and press [2, 1] to

select the predefined value.

≥You can also enter the frequency with numbered buttons.

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Network ID” and enter Network ID with

numbered buttons.

4 Press [OPTION] to add “Symbol Rate”, if needed.

≥If you do not need to add “Symbol Rate”, go to step 6.

5 Press [3, 4] to select “---- ksym/s (User Def.)” and enter the

symbol rate with numbered buttons and then press [OK].

6 Press [OK].

Advanced Setup starts.

If there is no signal quality and/

or signal strength, press the

“Red” button and select the

correct channel system.

[DVB-C] [DVB-T]

DVB Manual Tuning

NewChannel Name Type

RETURN

010

Bandwidth

Symbol Rate

Auto

Signal Quality

010

Signal Strength

Frequency

START

SCAN

Number

SELECT

Free TV : 0 Pay TV : 0 Radio : 0

No.

Frequency

MHz

338,00

0 9

DVB Manual Tuning

Frequency

MHz

NewChannel Name Type

RETURN

010

[CH24]

498,0

Signal Quality

Signal Strength

Channel System

Western Europe (CCIR)

Change Channel System

OFFSET

START SCAN

TV : 0 Radio : 0 Data : 0

No.

Add New DVB Channels

Progress 0%

100%

No. QualityChannel Name Type

Add New DVB Channels

Scan CH 5 69

CH QualityChannel Name Type

A new DVB Channel has been found.

Start DVB Auto Setup ?

Selecting DVB Auto Setup will delete

all Timer Programmes.

New Channel

NoYes

[Automatic] When a new DVB channel is added, New Channel

Message appears automatically.

If you select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts

(all channel settings are deleted. The timer

recording programmes are also cancelled.).

[Off] New Channel Message does not appear.

[DVB-C] [DVB-T]

Signal Quality 010

Signal Strength 010

DVB Channel

DVB Signal Condition

RETURN

Channel

–

Network Name

Parameter

1 Das Erste

Kabel Deutschland

113 MHz, 6900kS/s

Signal Quality 010

Signal Strength 010

DVB Channel

DVB Signal Condition

RETURN

Channel

–

[CH14] 5 BR3

Signal Quality 010

Signal Strength 010

DVB Channel

DVB Signal Condition

RETURN

Channel

–

[CH14] 5 BR3

DVB Advanced Setup

010

Network ID

Signal Quality

010

Signal Strength

Home Frequency

MHz

338,00

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 65 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Changing the unit’s settings

DVB Preferred Language

You can select up to 2 different subtitles and audio tracks to be used

when audio and subtitles of digital broadcasts are received. Select

the order of priority.

If the selected language is not available, then the language included

in the broadcast programme is selected.

[DVB-C] Hard of Hearing

Child Lock

You can restrict viewing and recording of the programmes unsuitable

for children.

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Child Lock” and press [OK].

2 Press the numbered buttons to enter a 4-digit PIN and press

[OK].

≥A confirmation message is displayed when a four-digit PIN is

entered for the first time. Press [OK].

≥Make a note of the 4-digit PIN in case you forget it.

≥To change the defined 4-digit PIN (> below)

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Parental Rating” and press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the age and press [OK].

To unlock

After performing steps 1–3

Press [3, 4] to select “No Limit” and press [OK].

≥If you make timer recordings of programmes on which “Child Lock”

works, PIN code entry is required when playing back the

recordings.

≥Parental control information of the recorded programmes is not

copied to discs.

To change the defined 4-digit PIN

You can change the defined four-digit PIN.

After performing steps 1–2

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Change PIN” and press [OK].

4 Press the numbered buttons to enter a new 4-digit PIN and press

[OK].

≥A confirmation message is displayed. Press [OK].

∫ Settings for Analogue Channels

Press [OK] to show the following setting.

Manual Tuning

You can delete analogue channels and set the analogue channel

details.

To delete a programme position

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the

“Red” button.

≥This unit does not support SECAM L, L’.

To change the tuning settings for individual programme

position

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press

[OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].

You can make the following two settings by selecting the external

input channel (AV1, AV2) in step 1.

≥Video System (Auto/PAL/SECAM)

In order to record properly, make the appropriate settings to match

the connected equipment.

≥Title Page (Auto/Off)

Multi Audio

Multi Audio ( alternative )

[English] [German] [Italian] [French]

[Spanish] [Turkish] [Czech] [Slovak]

[Hungarian] [Polish] [Russian]

[Original]

Subtitles

Subtitles ( alternative )

[English] [German] [Italian] [French]

[Spanish] [Turkish] [Czech] [Slovak]

[Hungarian] [Polish] [Russian]

[Original]

The language specified as “Original” by the broadcast channel

[On] If this service is available for the broadcasts, subtitles for

the hard of hearing are first priority.

[Off]

Child Lock

Enter a 4-digit PIN,

then press OK.

Number

0 - - 9



RETURN

Note

Pos

Programme position in the table

(You cannot change the programme position.)

Channel

To enter or change the Channel of a TV station

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and press [OK].

If the station name needs a blank space, select the blank

between “Z” and “¢”.

To enter newly available TV stations or change the CH

number of an already tuned TV station

Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter the CH number

of the desired TV station.

Wait a few moments until the desired TV station has been tuned.

After the desired TV station is tuned, press [OK].

Fine Tuning

To obtain the best tuning condition

Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition and press [OK].

≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.

Video System

To select the video system type

Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the picture lacks

colour, and press [OK].

≥Auto

This unit automatically distinguishes PAL and SECAM signals.

≥PAL

For receiving PAL signals.

≥SECAM

For receiving SECAM signals.

Mono

To select the type of sound to be recorded

Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is distorted due

to inferior reception conditions, or if you want to record the

normal (mono) sound during a stereo or bilingual broadcast, and

press [OK].

Title Page

To enter the Teletext title page for a channel

Entering title page number allows the unit to automatically record

programme and station names.

Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to enter the number and

press [OK].

≥To find the correct title page for the station, refer to its Teletext

TV guide.

Manual Tuning

Pos Channel CH Pos Channel CH

Delete

1 ARD 4

2 ZDF

3 N3

4 HR3

5 BR3 10

RETURN

SELECT

Note

Pos

Channel

Fine Tuning

Video System

901

Auto

Manual

Tuning

ARD

Auto

Mono

Off

Title Page

301

RETURN

SELECT

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 66 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Setting menus

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

[Other ¢¢¢¢]

Enter a code (> 76) with the numbered buttons.

When the selected language is not available on the disc, the

default language is played. There are discs where you can only

switch the language from the menu screen (> 18).

[DVD-V]

Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.

≥

Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you make here.

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Disc

Settings for Playback

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Ratings

Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.

Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the

numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown.

Do not forget your PIN.

Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)

[8 No Limit

] All DVD-Video can be played.

[1 to 7] Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding

ratings recorded on them.

[0 Lock All] Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.

≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)

[Unlock Recorder] [Change PIN]

[Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]

Soundtrack

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Russian] [Polish] [Czech]

[Original] The original language of each disc will be

selected.

[Other ¢¢¢¢]

Subtitles

[Automatic] If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not

available, subtitles of that language will

automatically appear if available on that disc.

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Russian] [Polish] [Czech]

[Other ¢¢¢¢]

Menus

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Russian] [Polish] [Czech]

[Other ¢¢¢¢]

Settings for Recording

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Recording time in EP mode

Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode

(> 23, Recording modes and approximate recording/copying

times).

[EP ( 6 hours )]

You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB disc.

[EP ( 8 hours )]

You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB disc.

≥The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6 hours )” than

when using “EP ( 8 hours )”.

Aspect for Recording

Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.

[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original

aspect used when recording started (including

when recording started at a commercial, etc.).

[16:9] [4:3

]

≥

When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec for High Speed

Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded in the original aspect ratio.

≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,

recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.

– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or

“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

– When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.

High-speed copy does not work for the titles recorded in 16:9 even

if they were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”

Chapter Creation

Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 42)

[Automatic

] [5 minutes]

[Off] No chapter start points are set.

Rec for High Speed Copy

You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using high

speed mode. However, aspect, etc. is restricted (

below).

We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to

DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.

This setting is effective when recording from a television

programme or external equipment, or when copying from a

finalised DVD-Video disc.

[On

] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press

[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded

titles.

– Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set

in “Aspect for Recording” (> left).

– Select the type of audio in advance from

“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 68).

– You are no longer able to switch the audio when

watching a programme on an input channel on the

TV connected to this unit (e.g., AV1, etc).

[Off]

DVD Speed for High Speed Copy

Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed

copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X discs).

[Maximum]

[Normal ( Silent )] The noise generated by this unit is less

than when “Maximum” is selected, however

the time required for copying will double

(approximately).

Start Recording Time

This function sets the timer recording to start earlier than the TV Guide time.

[1 min earlier] [3 min earlier] [5 min earlier]

[10 min earlier] [Off

]

Finish Recording Time

This function sets the timer recording to stop later than the TV Guide time.

[1 min later] [3 min later] [5 min later]

[10 min later] [Off

]

Picture

Comb Filter

Select the picture sharpness when recording.

The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC” (

69).

[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.

[Off] Select it when recording noisy pictures.

Still Mode

Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (

85, Frames and fields).

[Automatic]

[Field] Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is

selected. (The picture is coarser.)

[Frame] Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen

clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture

is clearer and finer.)

Seamless Play

Select the play mode between Playlist chapter segments and

partially deleted titles.

[On

]

The chapters in Playlists (Video) are played seamlessly. This

does not work when there are several audio types included on

the Playlists (Video) and when using Quick View (PLAY

1.3).

Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may change

slightly.

[Off] The points where chapters in

Playlists (Video)

change are

played accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 67 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Changing the unit’s settings

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify

whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Sound

Dynamic Range Compression

[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)

Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.

[On] [Off

]

Bilingual Audio Selection

(Analogue broadcast only)

Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:

≥Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.

≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.

≥Recording or copying sound in LPCM (> right, “Audio Mode for

XP Recording”).

[M 1

][M2]

≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an

external source, such as when copying from a video cassette

recorder. Select the audio on the other equipment.

Digital Audio Output

Change the settings when you have connected equipment through

this unit’s Digital Audio Output terminal (> 73).

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

PCM Down Conversion

Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.

≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if

the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the

disc has copy protection.

[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment cannot process signals with a

sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

[Off

] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment can process signals with a

sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

Dolby Digital

Select how to output the signal.

Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.

Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2 channels.

≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.

[Bitstream

] When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby

Digital decoder.

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in

Dolby Digital decoder.

DTS

Select how to output the signal.

Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the

signal.

Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2

channels.

≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.

[Bitstream

] When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS

decoder.

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in

DTS decoder.

MPEG

Select how to output the signal.

Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.

Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2

channels.

≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.

[Bitstream] When connected to equipment with a built-in

MPEG decoder.

[PCM

] When connected to equipment without a built-in

MPEG decoder.

Audio Mode for XP Recording

Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.

[Dolby Digital

] (> 85) [LPCM] (> 85)

≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of

normal XP mode recordings.

≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected

LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.

≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> left).

Display

Language

Choose the language for these menus and on-screen messages.

[English] [Deutsch

] [Français] [Italiano]

[Español] [Polski] [Русский]

On-Screen Messages

Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information

screen (> 17) disappears automatically.

The length of time the control panel (> 40) is displayed can also

be changed, but “Off” does not work.

[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)

[3 sec.] [5 sec.]

[7 sec.] [10 sec.]

Grey Background

Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey

background when tuner reception is weak.

[On

] [Off]

Unit’s Display

Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.

This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save in

Standby” to “On” or “On Timer” (> 70).

[Bright

] [Dim]

[Automatic] The display turns dark during play and disappears

when the unit is turned off. When “Power Save in

Standby” is activated (> 70), power consumption

while in standby mode is reduced.

Pause Live TV Icon

Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the on-screen

icon while using the Pause Live TV function.

[On

] [Off]

Screen Saver

[On] When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes

while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is

displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].

[Off]

Teletext Character Set

Select Teletext language.

[West

] English, French, German, Greek, Italian, Spanish,

Swedish, Turkish, etc.

[East 1] Czech, English, Estonian, Lettish, Rumanian,

Russian, Ukrainian, etc.

[East 2] Czech, Hungarian, Lettish, Polish, Rumanian,

Slovak, etc.

FUNCTION MENU Display

[On] When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be

displayed. (> 5)

[Off]

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 68 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Setting menus

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be

shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may

not be able to change the settings.

Connection

TV Aspect

Set to match the type of television connected.

[16:9

] When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.

[Pan & Scan]

When connected to a 4:3 aspect

television, side picture is trimmed

for 16:9 picture.

[Letterbox]

When connected to a 4:3 aspect

television. 16:9 picture is shown in

the letterbox style.

TV System

Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting

with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles

on the HDD.

[PAL

] ≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system

television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as

PAL 60.

≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input

from other equipment.

≥[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on

the HDD.

[NTSC] ≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.

Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.

≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.

≥[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded

on the HDD.

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can

be recorded onto the HDD.)

≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be

used.

≥During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,

this unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System”

(PAL/NTSC) setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before

playing them.

To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)

While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the

main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

Note

HDMI Settings

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

HDMI Video Format

You can only select items compatible with the connected

equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.

However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may

be improved by changing the setting.

≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need

to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this

unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must

also be 1080p compatible.

[576i / 480i] [576p / 480p] [720p] [1080i]

[1080p] When setting video output to “1080p”, we

recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that

have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and

are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion

etc.

[Automatic

] Automatically selects the output resolution best

suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,

720p, 576p / 480p or 576i / 480i).

Aspect for 4:3 Video

To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how

to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.

[4:3

]

Picture output expands left or right.

[16:9]

Picture is output as original aspect with

side panels.

Digital Audio Output

[HDMI and Optical]

[Optical Only]

Select when this unit is connected to an

amplifier with an optical digital audio cable and

connected to a TV with an HDMI cable and

you want to enjoy the highest quality of audio

from discs (

73).

VIERA Link

Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an

HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.

[On

]

[Off] Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.

AV1 Output

Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.

If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select

“RGB 1” or “RGB 2”.

[Video

]

Select when a TV that can receive a composite signal is

connected.

[S Video]

Select when a TV that can receive an S Video signal is

connected.

[RGB 1]

Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If

you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB

signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch

to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.

[RGB 2]

Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If

you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only

when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 69 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Changing the unit’s settings

Can be selected when selecting Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T)

Channels in Auto Setup

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

AV2 Settings

Set to match the connected equipment.

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

AV2 Input

Set to “S Video” when receiving or recording S Video output from

external equipment.

[Video

] [S Video]

Ext Link

This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to

“NTSC” (> 69).

[Ext Link 1] When a digital satellite receiver which transmits a

special control signal recordings via the 21-pin

Scart cable is connected.

Start and stop timings of recording are controlled

by the control signal.

[Ext Link 2

] When external equipment with a timer function is

connected.

When it turns on, recording starts.

When it turns off, recording stops.

Active Antenna

[On] Select this when you will use indoor antenna that is not

equipped with power supply.

[Off

]

Common Interface

Access to software contained on Common Interface (CI) modules.

(> 6, 10) Follow the on-screen instructions.

Others

Remote Control

Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote

control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products

close together.

[DVD 1

] [DVD 2] [DVD 3]

Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.

Press [

] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”)

and press [OK].

To change the code on the remote control

2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button

([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.

3 Press [OK].

∫ When the following indicator appears on the

unit’s display

The unit’s remote control code

Change the code on the remote

control to match the main unit’s

(> step 2).

Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main

unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1

(> step 2).

Setup

Tuning

Remote Control

Press “” and “OK” together

for more than 5 seconds on the remote

control.

Disc

Picture

Note

Clock

This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital

broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a

day. However, if the time is not set correctly, use the settings listed

in the method below.

Press [

3, 4]

to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.

The items change as follows:

Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year

^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J

3 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.

You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.

The clock starts.

If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when

“Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic

time correction function checks the time and if necessary it is

adjusted several times every day.

Standby Settings

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Power Save in Standby

[On] It will go into “Power Save in Standby” mode

when the unit is in standby mode.

[Off] It is possible to start quickly from the standby

mode. (Quick Start mode)

[On Timer] “Power Save in Standby” is set to activate

during the setting time period. (> below)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “On Timer” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to set the start time (hour).

3 Press [2, 1] to select the stop time and press [3, 4] to

set the stop time (hour).

4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.

≥You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

≥You can set start and stop time by the hour.

≥If the clock has not been set, “Power Save in Standby” is

activated at all hours.

Clock

Automatic

Time Date

Please set clock manually.

OK: store RETURN: leave

RETURN

SELECT

CHANGE

Off

00 :

. 1

2010

0 9

Number

e.g., This screen appears

while receiving a digital

broadcast.

Note

Power Save in Standby

Power Save On Timer

:00

From

:00

Saves standby power consumption

by disabling Quick Start function and

AV2 loop-through in standby. Unit's Display

is set to "Automatic".

Press OK to manually set the period of

Power Save.

0 9

Number

RETURN

SELECT

CHANGE

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 70 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Setting menus

§1

When “Digital Channels” is selected in “TV Guide Type”

§2

When “Analogue Channels” is selected in “TV Guide Type”

§1

The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

§2

Recording on the HDD will not be deleted.

Auto Standby

Set the time to automatically turn the unit off.

After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off

once the set time has passed.

[30 minutes] [1 hour] [2 hours] [4 hours

]

[6 hours]

[Off] The unit will not automatically turn off.

Auto Standby after OTR

[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not

operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing

One Touch Recording (> 19).

[Off]

Auto Standby after Copy

[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not

operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing

copy (> 51-59).

[Off

]

RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )

[On] Broadcast signals are output from this unit.

TV can receive broadcast signals even if this unit is in

standby mode when connecting TV with this unit using

the RF cable (> 73).

[Off] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” when the confirmation

message is displayed.

Broadcast signals are not output from this unit to reduce

standby power consumption.

≥Power consumption is lowered additionally when

“Power Save in Standby” is activated.

≥If this unit turns into standby mode when connecting TV

with this unit using the RF cable, proper broadcast

images do not appear on TV.

TV Guide Type

This unit can receive either of the TV Guides for the digital or

analogue broadcasts.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

≥It will go into Standby status once, and the power will be turned

on again automatically. This procedure may take a few minutes.

≥All of the TV Guide data for digital broadcasts and timer

recording settings will be erased.

[Digital Channels

] [Analogue Channels]

System Update

In order to update this unit’s software, the TV Guide download, and

to support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit

periodically performs software updates.

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

≥Only the TV Guide for digital broadcast can be downloaded with

this setting. Refer to page 9 for analogue broadcasts.

≥Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an

unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates,

you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.

≥An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update

is in progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display. You cannot

operate the unit until the update is complete. Removing the AC

mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit.

≥TV Guide download will take approximately 60 minutes. While

the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the

unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by

switching on the unit.

TV Guide Download in Standby

[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, TV Guide data is

downloaded automatically.

[Off]

≥In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is available, the setting

is fixed to “On” automatically.

Software Update in Standby

[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, software

updates are downloaded automatically.

[Off]

TV Guide/Software search period

§1

Software Search Period

§2

Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download

and updates when the unit is set to standby mode. This can only

be set when “TV Guide Download in Standby” or “Software

Update in Standby” is set to “On”.

≥If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have

selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.

In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is not available:

[Automatic

]

[02:00–06:00] [06:00–10:00] [10:00–14:00]

[14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00]

In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is available:

[Automatic

]

[Daytime] (06:00-22:00)

The unit will give priority to searching for TV Guide download

and update data at midnight.

Software Update Search Now

Start the search for new software manually.

A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn

your unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of

data. A message shows that the update has finished.

≥If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”

and press [OK].

[DVB-T] GUIDE Plus+ Data Download Now

Start downloading GUIDE Plus+ data.

≥If this is performed in standby mode for timer recording, timer

recording may not work correctly.

[DVB-T] GUIDE Plus+ System Information

You can check the condition of GUIDE Plus+ system of this unit.

[DVB-T] Post Code

You can input the postal code which is necessary to download

area specific information of GUIDE Plus+ system.

Initialize

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Shipping Condition

§1, §2

All the settings except for the language settings, Slideshow

Settings, clock settings, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc

menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory

preset.

[Yes] [No

]

Default Settings

§1, §2

All the settings except for the tuning settings, clock settings,

language settings, disc language settings, remote control code,

ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock”

in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory presets.

[Yes] [No

]

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 71 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Other Settings

You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn

the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the

television channel and change the television volume.

1 Point the remote control at the

television

While pressing [Í TV], enter the code

with the numbered buttons.

2 Test by turning on the television and

changing channels.

≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows

correct operation.

≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for

your television does not allow control of your television, this

remote control is not compatible with your television.

≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the

one that allows correct operation.

Manufacturer and Code No.

The HOLD function deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote

control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.

Press and hold [OK] and

[RETURN ]

simultaneously until “X

HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.

If you press a button while the HOLD function is on, “X HOLD”

appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.

To cancel the HOLD function

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X

HOLD” disappears.

Software of CAM (compatible CI Plus) can be upgraded

automatically from broadcasts.

Availability of software upgrade is detected while viewing the

programmes compatible with CI Plus.

When notification is displayed on the screen, select “Yes” and

press [OK].

≥Notice is not displayed in the following cases:

– When recording a programme

– When timer recording and CAM software upgrade occur

simultaneously

– When displaying FUNCTION MENU, DIRECT NAVIGATOR, etc.

≥“CAM-UP” is displayed on the unit’s display during upgrading.

It is also displayed on the Digital Channel Information (> 17) when

the CAM software can be upgraded immediately.

To execute CAM software upgrade, push the “Red” button while the

digital channel information is displayed, and follow the instructions

on the screen.

≥Operations such as view, playback, or record cannot be performed

while upgrading the CAM.

Any buttons on the remote control or the unit cannot be used while

upgrading the CAM.

≥If the timer recording is started, CAM software upgrade is

cancelled to start recording.

≥For details, refer to your CAM’s operating instructions or consult

your dealer.

Television operation

e.g., 01: [0] > [1] 10: [1] > [0]

PAGE

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT

VOL

Turn TV on/off

Input select

Volume

Channel Select

Note

AIWA 35 MITSUBISHI 05/19/20/47

BEJING 33 NEC 36

BENQ 58/59 NOKIA 25/26/27/60/61

BRANDT 10/15 OLEVIA 45

CENTREX 66 ORION 05

CURTIS 05 PHILCO 41/48/64

DESMET 05 PHONOLA 05

ELEMIS 05 PROVIEW 52

FINLUX 61 RADIOLA 05

FUJITSU 53 SALORA 26

GOLDSTAR 05/50/51 SANSUI 05

GRADIENTE 36 SCHNEIDER 05/29/30

HIKONA 52 SELECO 05/25

INNO HIT 05 SIEMENS 09

ITT 25 SONY 08

JVC 17/30/39/70 TELEFUNKEN 10/11/12/13/14

KOLIN 45 TEX ONDA 52

LG 05/50/51 TOSHIBA 16/57

MAG 52 YAMAHA 18/41

Brand Code Brand Code

05LOEWE

WHITE

WESTINGHOUSE

07/46

Panasonic 01/02/03/04 METZ 05/28/79

AKAI 27/30 MIVAR 24

BEKO 05/71/72/73/74 NOBLEX 33

BP 09 NORDMENDE 10

BUSH 05 ONWA 30/39/70

CHANGHONG 69 PEONY 49/69

DAEWOO 64/65 PHILIPS 05/06/46

DUAL 05 PIONEER 37/38

FERGUSON 10/34 PYE 05

FUNAI 32/42/43/65/6863/67 SAMSUNG

FISHER 21 SABA 10

GOODMANS 05 SANYO 21/54/55/56

GRUNDIG

05/69/75/76/77/78

09 SEG

IRRADIO 30 SINUDYNE 05

JINGXING 31/33/66/67/6949 TCL

KDS 52 TEVION 52

KONKA 62 THOMSON 10/15/44

HITACHI 05/22/23/40/41 SHARP 18

HOLD function

CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional

Access Module) software upgrade

1 Das Erste

All Channels

18:53

Change Category

CAM Upgrade Info

ZDF-Mor

19:00 - 19:30

NOW

TXT

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 72 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Reference

Additional connections

Reference

≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an

amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.

“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (> 68)

≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital

audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you

can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting

“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (> 69).

In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the

television.

≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not supplied),

check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.

≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

Connecting an amplifier with a digital

input terminal

Required setting

ON INTERFACE

COMMON INTERFACE

OPTICAL

OPTICAL IN

Optical digital audio

cable

Do not bend sharply

when connecting.

This unit’s rear panel

Insert fully, with

this side facing

up.

Amplifier’s rear panel

Connecting a VCR with AUDIO/VIDEO

terminal

R L

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO

OUT

This unit’s front panel

VCR’s rear panel

Audio/Video cable

Connecting a television and VCR, digital satellite receiver

Only when connecting digital satellite receiver with this unit

“AV2 Input” setting in the Setup menu (> 70)

Connect the unit directly to the television (> 6)

OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV1

(

)

AV2

(

EXT

)

AC IN

COMMON INTERFACE

VHF/UHF

RF IN

VHF/UHF

RF IN

RF OUT

OPTICAL

To the terrestrial aerial

RF coaxial cable

This unit’s rear panel

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

AC mains lead

(supplied)

Connect only after all

other connections are

complete.

21-pin Scart cable

RF coaxial cable

(supplied)

Cooling fan

Connecting a terminal

other than the 21-pin

Scart terminal

(> 7, 74)

Television’s rear panel

VCR’s rear panel

Digital satellite

receiver’s rear panel

21-pin Scart

cable

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

Common Interface (CI) slot

Cable

Aerial cable/

CATV Coaxial

cable

Required setting

Setting menus

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 73 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Additional connections

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.

Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital

terrestrial broadcasts?

¾ You can use your current aerial. Room rod aerials are also

suitable. Use an indoor antenna if the reception is poor. Consult

your local TV aerial installer.

Can this unit receive or record High Definition

(HD) broadcasts?

¾ Yes .

However, HD broadcasts are down-converted to SD video

when receiving or recording them.

What equipment is necessary to play multi

channel surround sound?

¾ You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without

other equipment. You must connect this unit with an HDMI

cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a

built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder. (> 7, 73)

Are the headphones and speakers directly

connected to the unit?

¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through

the amplifier etc. (> 73)

Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs bought in

another country?

¾ You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not

include “2” or “ALL”.

Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information. (> Cover)

Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region

number be played?

¾ The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a

standard. You cannot play discs that do not have a region

number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to a

standard.

Please tell me about disc compatibility with this

unit.

¾ This unit records/copies on the following discs (HDD):

– Records TV programme or other contents by pressing

[¥ REC], Timer Recording or Flexible Recording: HDD only

– Records using EXT LINK: HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-R/DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format)/+R/+RW

– Copies titles: HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-R/DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format)/DVD-R DL/+R/+RW/+R DL

This unit plays the following discs:

HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL/+R/+RW/+R DL/

DVD-Video/CD/Video CD/SVCD (> 12–13)

¾ This unit also records and plays high speed recording

compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW

discs.

Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW

compatibility with this unit.

¾ This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded

in one of the following standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD

(conforming to IEC62107), MP3 and still pictures (JPEG).

(> 13, 14)

¾ You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.

Can I record from a commercially purchased

video cassette or DVD?

¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy

protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.

Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit

be played on other equipment?

¾ You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players

after finalising the disc on this unit. However, depending on the

condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and

capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.

¾ If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible

equipment.

Connecting a television with AUDIO/

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO IN

R L

VIDEO

This unit’s rear panel

Audio/Video cable

Television’s rear panel

Connecting a stereo amplifier

OUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO IN

R L

Audio cable

This unit’s rear panel

Amplifier’s rear panel

Frequently asked questions

Set up

Disc

Recording

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 74 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Reference

Can a digital audio signal from this unit be

recorded to other equipment?

¾ You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD,

change the “Digital Audio Output” settings to the following in the

Setup menu. (> 68)

– PCM Down Conversion: On

– Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM

However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is

permitted and the recording equipment is compatible with a

sampling frequency of 48 kHz.

¾ You cannot record MP3 signals.

[Analogue] Can I switch to bilingual broadcast

during recording?

¾ Yes, you can. Just press [AUDIO] during recording on HDD.

(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”) (> 33)

Can I high speed copy to a disc?

¾ Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to

“On” before recording the programme.)

Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies. (> 51)

What can or cannot be done using the USB port

on this unit?

¾ You can play MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB

memory. (> 36)

¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the

HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 56, 57)

¾ You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD. (> 58)

¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the

HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 55)

¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB

memory.

¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory

cannot be formatted on this unit.

¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 14)

Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the

disc or USB memory?

¾ No, you cannot.

Is it possible to programme a recording, with a

start and end time that are different from the TV

Guide system?

¾ You can manually change the start and end time of

programmes in the Timer Recording menu. (> 27)

¾ If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the start

recording time and finish recording time can be set to a margin

of up to 10 minutes. (> 67, Start Recording Time, Finish

Recording Time)

Can I receive TV Guide system data via a

connected digital satellite receiver or a Set Top

Box?

¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with

digital satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use the

External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer programming.

(> 25, 27)

How can I cancel a Timer programming?

¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then

press [DELETE ¢]. (> 27)

What happens when I unplug the unit from the

household mains socket?

¾ The TV Guide data will not be updated.

¾ If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for

a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.

¾ Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.

What happens if my postal code changes, e.g. if I

move?

¾ TV Guide data may not be downloaded correctly. Change “Post

Code” in the Setup menu (for [DVB-T]), or change the postal

code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu (for [Analogue]). If

necessary, perform a full Auto-Setup. Saved TV Guide data

may be lost. (> 31, 64, 71)

[Analogue] Why is the GUIDE Plus+ system only

available after approx. 2 hours?

¾ The data rate, at which GUIDE Plus+ is sent, is limited.

Depending on the country, signal quality and number of

channels received, the time until the GUIDE Plus+ system is

ready can vary.

[Analogue] How often is the GUIDE Plus+ data

updated and when?

¾ The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel

(the television station transmitting the television programme list)

several times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every

day.

It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.

The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the

unit is turned off. (> 10)

Please tell me about TV reception channels.

¾ Channel coverage depends on the tuner system you use.

Refer to the following list of TV Reception Channels.

List of TV Reception Channels

USB

Music

TV Guide

TV Channels

Tuner

System

Channel

Coverage

VHF UHF CATV

PAL-B,G,H CCIR E2 – E12

A – H2

(Italy)

21 – 69 S01 – S05

(S1 – S3)

S1 – S20

(M1 – U10)

S21 – S41

DVB-T/C Germany 5 – 12 21 – 69 D051 - D073,

D113 - D858,

S1–S20

(M1–U10)

7 MHz Band

51 – 858 MHz

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 75 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Messages

Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.

On the television

Cannot finish recording completely.

Copy-protect signal was detected.

≥The programme was copy-protected.

Disc is full, or maximum number of titles are

recorded. Cannot finish recording completely.

≥The HDD or disc may be full.

≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded. (> 23)

≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.

[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is

no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW

increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.] (> 21, 43, 62)

≥Use a new disc.

Cannot record.

Maximum number of titles exceeded.

Cannot playback.

TV system is different from the setting.

To playback, please change the TV System in

Setup.

≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV

system currently selected on the unit.

Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 69)

Cannot play on this unit. ≥You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 14)

No Disc ≥The disc may be upside down.

No folders. ≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. (> 14)

Not enough space in the copy destination. ≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 21, 43, 47, 62)

≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination

Capacity:” is not exceeded. (> 54, 57, 59)

This is a non-recordable disc. ≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 15)

≥The unit cannot record/copy on the disc you inserted. Insert a compatible disc for this

unit. (> 12)

≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. (> 62)

Unable to format.

This disc is not formatted properly.

Format it using DVD Management

in FUNCTION MENU.

Not enough space on HDD. Space of 4 hours

( in SP mode ) is necessary.

Maximum number of titles is recorded on HDD.

Please delete unwanted titles.

≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD

or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are

greater than 499.

Delete unwanted titles from the HDD. (> 21, 43, 62)

$ ≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.

Abkhazian: 6566

Afar: 6565

Afrikaans: 6570

Albanian: 8381

Amharic: 6577

Arabic: 6582

Armenian: 7289

Assamese: 6583

Aymara: 6589

Azerbaijani: 6590

Bashkir: 6665

Basque: 6985

Bengali; Bangla:

6678

Bhutani: 6890

Bihari: 6672

Breton: 6682

Bulgarian: 6671

Burmese: 7789

Byelorussian: 6669

Cambodian: 7577

Catalan: 6765

Chinese: 9072

Corsican: 6779

Croatian: 7282

Czech: 6783

Danish: 6865

Dutch: 7876

English: 6978

Esperanto: 6979

Estonian: 6984

Faroese: 7079

Fiji: 7074

Finnish: 7073

French: 7082

Frisian: 7089

Galician: 7176

Georgian: 7565

German: 6869

Greek: 6976

Greenlandic: 7576

Guarani: 7178

Gujarati: 7185

Hausa: 7265

Hebrew: 7387

Hindi: 7273

Hungarian: 7285

Icelandic: 7383

Indonesian: 7378

Interlingua: 7365

Irish: 7165

Italian: 7384

Japanese: 7465

Javanese: 7487

Kannada: 7578

Kashmiri: 7583

Kazakh: 7575

Kirghiz: 7589

Korean: 7579

Kurdish: 7585

Laotian: 7679

Latin: 7665

Latvian, Lettish: 7686

Lingala: 7678

Lithuanian: 7684

Macedonian: 7775

Malagasy: 7771

Malay: 7783

Malayalam: 7776

Maltese: 7784

Maori: 7773

Marathi: 7782

Moldavian: 7779

Mongolian: 7778

Nauru: 7865

Nepali: 7869

Norwegian: 7879

Oriya: 7982

Pashto, Pushto: 8083

Persian: 7065

Polish: 8076

Portuguese: 8084

Punjabi: 8065

Quechua: 8185

Rhaeto-Romance:

8277

Romanian: 8279

Russian: 8285

Samoan: 8377

Sanskrit: 8365

Scots Gaelic: 7168

Serbian: 8382

Serbo-Croatian: 8372

Shona: 8378

Sindhi: 8368

Singhalese: 8373

Slovak: 8375

Slovenian: 8376

Somali: 8379

Spanish: 6983

Sundanese: 8385

Swahili: 8387

Swedish: 8386

Tagalog: 8476

Tajik: 8471

Tamil: 8465

Tatar: 8484

Telugu: 8469

Thai: 8472

Tibetan: 6679

Tigrinya: 8473

Tonga: 8479

Turkish: 8482

Turkmen: 8475

Twi: 8487

Ukrainian: 8575

Urdu: 8582

Uzbek: 8590

Vietnamese: 8673

Volapük: 8679

Welsh: 6789

Wolof: 8779

Xhosa: 8872

Yiddish: 7473

Yoruba: 8979

Zulu: 9085

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 76 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Reference

The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.

The message are alternately displayed.

On the unit’s display

DVD 

(“∑” stands for a number.)

≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than 5

seconds. (> 70)

GUIDE ≥TV Guide data is being downloaded. (> 10, 71)

HARD ERR

≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

NoERAS ≥You cannot delete items on this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

NoREAD ≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 15)

≥This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 11)

NoWRIT ≥You cannot write to this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

PLEASE WAIT

≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its

recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the

message disappears.

PROG FULL

≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. (> 27)

REMOVE ≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device and turn the unit off.

SP 35:50

LP 151h

“SP”, “LP” and the

numbers are examples.

≥Available space on the HDD or disc.

The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is

displayed when over 100 hours are available.

“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.

SW-DL ≥The unit is performing a software update. (> 71)

CAM-UP ≥CAM is being upgraded. (> 72)

UNFORMAT

≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)

that has been recorded on other equipment.

Format the disc to use it.

However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (> 62)

UNSUPPORT

≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. (> 12–13)

≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (> 14)

F74 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.

Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

F75 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.

Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

U50 ≥A short circuit was detected in the aerial input. Please check your aerial.

U59 ≥The unit is hot.

The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.

Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.

U61 ≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred. This is displayed when the unit is in the

recovery process to return to normal operation. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.

If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

U76 ≥HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.

U80

U81

U99

≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode.

Now press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.

U88 ≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,

playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation. Once

the display clears you can use the unit again. (> 78)

If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

H or F ≥ There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)

≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following.

(> 78–83)

1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.

2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)

If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform

the dealer of the service number when requesting service.

X HOLD ≥The HOLD function is activated.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (> 72)

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 77 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Troubleshooting guide

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart

do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.

No power.

The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].

¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active

household mains socket. (> 6, 73)

¾ Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording

standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [Í] is

pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.

(> 25)

The unit switches to standby mode.

¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the

main unit to turn the unit on.

The power is turned off automatically.

¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV

with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Link-

compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will

be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to

standby mode. (> 39)

This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.

¾ This is a normal phenomenon when using VIERA Link (HDAVI

Control 4 or later). For details please read the operating

instructions for the TV.

The display is dim.

¾ Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (> 68)

“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.

¾ Set the clock. (> 70)

The time recorded on the disc and the available

time shown do not add up.

The displayed time of this unit is different from

the actual recording time or MP3 recording time.

¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.

¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or

+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It

does not increase if other titles are deleted.

¾ Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R

DL, +R or +R DL, there is no increase in disc space.

¾ More disc space than the actual recording time is used after

recording or editing the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200

times or more.

¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.

The clock is not correct.

¾ Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time

correction function may not work. In this case, “Automatic” is

automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting

does not work, set the time manually. (> 70)

Compared to the actual recorded time, the

elapsed time displayed is less.

(Only when recording in NTSC)

¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the

number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to

1 second. There will be a slight difference between the time

displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual 1 hour

elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes

56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.

“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be

ejected.

¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following

to eject the disc.

1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on

the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly

switched to standby.

While the unit is off, press and hold [

∫

] and [CH

]

on the main

unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.

Television reception worsens or becomes

impossible after connecting the unit.

¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between

the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal

booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved

by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.

¾ Broadcast signals may not be output from this unit’s RF OUT

terminal. Select “On” in “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” in the Setup

menu. (> 71)

The digital channel information or control panel

does not appear.

Status messages do not appear.

¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen

Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 68)

¾ The digital channel information will not appear during playback

or recording.

¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV

supporting “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 40)

¾ Analogue broadcasts do not support the digital channel

information.

Some functions of DVB-C/DVB-T do not work.

¾ The unit does not necessarily support all DVB-C/DVB-T

functions such as MHP (Multimedia Home Platform) etc.

New functions introduced by broadcasters cannot be

guaranteed to work.

The grey background does not appear.

¾ Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu. (> 68)

Screen size is wrong.

¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu. (> 69)

¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to

“16:9” in the Setup menu. (> 69)

The recorded title’s screen size is wrong.

¾ Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for

Recording” to “4:3”. (> 67)

¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the

following cases.

– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR

(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.

– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.

– If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in

the Setup menu.

When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same

aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the

“Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (> 67)

By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance

that the recording will be made using the wrong aspect. Match the

aspect settings to the broadcast when recording. (

67)

It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to

your television’s operating instructions.

The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:

≥Regular disc rotating sounds.

≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.

≥Image disturbance during search.

≥

Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting breaks.

≥Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save in Standby” is

activated.

≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again

using a Panasonic disc.)

≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.

(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 3 seconds.)

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected

sound.

Power

Displays

TV screen and video

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 78 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Reference

Picture does not appear during timer recording.

¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.

To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the

unit on.

The screen changes automatically.

¾ When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the

display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if

there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. (> 68) Press [OK]

to return to the previous screen.

There is a lot of after-image when playing video.

¾ Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 60)

There is no apparent change in picture quality

when adjusted with the Picture menu in the on-

screen menus.

¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.

The images from this unit do not appear on the

television.

Picture is distorted.

¾ Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal,

VIDEO OUT terminal or HDMI terminal on this unit.

(> 6, 7, 73, 74)

Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.

¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used

by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and

[< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The

system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 69)

¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that

matches with this unit’s TV system.

¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are

connected with HDMI cables.

Reduce the number of connected devices.

The picture is distorted during play, or video will

not play correctly.

¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor

reception or unfavourable weather conditions.

¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear

briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:

– between titles recorded with different recording modes.

– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.

– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.

– between playlist chapters.

No sound.

Low volume.

Distorted sound.

Cannot hear the desired audio type.

¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.

Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected

one. (> 7, 68, 69, 73, 74)

¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (> 33)

¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are

connected with HDMI cables.

Reduce the number of connected devices.

¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is

output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,

set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in the Setup

menu. (> 69)

¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be

distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

¾ When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you can only

record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual

broadcast.

If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for

High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”. (> 67)

Cannot switch audio.

¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.

– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is

selected.

– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 68)

– When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default

setting is “On”). (> 67)

¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an

HDMI cable. You cannot switch the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set

to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using

audio cables. (> 7, 68, 73)

¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of

how the disc was created.

Cannot operate the television.

The remote control doesn’t work.

¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be

operated even if you change the code. (> 72)

¾ The remote control and main unit are using different codes.

Change the code on the remote control. (> 70)

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated

number button at the same time for

more than 5 seconds.

¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (> 2)

¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s

remote control signal sensor during operation. (> 2)

¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.

¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that

may be subject to sunlight exposure.

¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again

after changing the batteries. (> 70)

¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after

changing the batteries. (> 72)

¾ The HOLD function is activated. (> 72)

The unit is on but cannot be operated.

¾ Playback drive has not been selected properly. (> 18)

¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.

¾ The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to

disappear.

¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.

Reset the unit as follows:

1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on

the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly

switched to standby.

Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one

minute, then reconnect it.

2 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still

cannot be operated, consult the dealer.

Cannot eject disc.

¾ The unit is recording.

Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording

standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [

] is pressed).

Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby. (

25)

¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and

hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about

5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.

If the HOLD function is activated, above operation does not

work. Cancel the HOLD function. (> 72)

Sound

Operation

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 79 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Troubleshooting guide

Cannot tune channels.

¾ Check the connections. (> 6, 73)

Startup is slow.

¾ Deactivate “Power Save in Standby” in the Setup menu. (> 70)

¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:

– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.

– The clock is not set.

– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is

connected.

– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

Cannot record.

Cannot copy.

¾ You cannot record TV programmes or other contents directly to

the disc by pressing [¥ REC], Timer Recording or Flexible

Recording. Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs.

(> 22)

¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be

recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (> 12)

¾ The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R]

[+R]DL] [+RW] (> 62)

¾ The disc is protected with DVD Management. (> 62)

¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times

they can be recorded (CPRM). (> 85)

¾ You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the

number of titles has reached its limit. Delete unwanted titles or

use a new disc. (> 21, 43, 62)

¾ Video cannot be recorded onto a DVD-R with still images

recorded on it.

¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy.

Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy. (> 21,

43, 62)

– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will

copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire

disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode

recording is necessary).

– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be

copied has exceeded 499.

¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you

can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.

¾ Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to

record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or

switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty

times.

¾ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL

and +RW recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other

Panasonic DVD Recorders.

¾ This unit cannot copy NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes

can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with

both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.

¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected.

¾ If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry

screen may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your

4-digit PIN and press [OK].

Cannot record from external equipment.

¾ Check that the connection is correct. (> 26, 55, 73, 74)

¾ Select the input channel (“AV2” or “AV3”) for the equipment you

have connected.

Timer recording does not work properly.

¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme

times overlap. Correct the programme. (> 27)

¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer

icon “F” in the timer recording list is not on.) (> 27)

¾ Set the clock. (> 70)

¾ The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be

correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times to

allow a margin of a few minutes, or set “Start Recording Time”

and “Finish Recording Time” in the Setup menu. (> 27, 67)

Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is

pressed.

¾ When using the linked timer recording with external equipment,

press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L” disappears.) (> 25)

¾ If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while

“Power Save in Standby” is not activated (Quick Start mode),

you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.

The timer programme remains even after

recording finishes.

¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.

A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.

¾ If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the

household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may

be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.

You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or

use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost

programmes or discs. (> 62)

The programme name and the recorded title do

not match.

¾ There was a programme change after timer recording was set

but the recorded title still has the old programme name.

Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc. disc using the high

speed mode.

¾ When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to

“On” in the Setup menu. (The default setting is “On”). (> 67)

¾ In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if

the titles were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to

“On”.

– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings

5 hours or longer)” mode.

– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in 16:9 aspect.

– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode

or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.

¾ [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD

recorders with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then

copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or

+RW discs with high-speed copy.

When copying, it takes a long time even when

high speed mode is selected.

¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if

the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum

speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.

¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.

¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours

when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not

compatible with EP ( 8 hours ) mode recording.

An unusually loud sound is coming from the

rotating DVD-R, etc.

¾ When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound

of the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is

not a problem.

Recording, timer recording and

copying

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 80 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Reference

Play fails to start even when [1](PLAY) is

pressed.

Play starts but then stops immediately.

¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 15)

¾ The disc is dirty. (> 15)

¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.

(> 12–13)

¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the

equipment used for recording.

¾ You may be able to copy a copyright-protected title that was

recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD

Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to

¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8 hours )” mode, play

may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with

DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP ( 6 hours )” mode. (> 67)

¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages

are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

¾ If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry

screen may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your

4-digit PIN and press [OK].

Audio and video momentarily pause.

¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.

¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles

on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high

speed mode.

¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.

¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the

unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in

the same way as a normal programme. However, video and

audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching

layers. (> 22)

DVD-Video is not played.

¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change

this setting. (> 67)

¾ Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is

not defective. (> Cover)

Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be

selected.

¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.

¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the

soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus

to make changes. (> 18)

No subtitles.

¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.

¾ Turn the subtitles on and select “Text” or the subtitle number.

(> 60)

Angle cannot be changed.

¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different

angles are recorded.

You have forgotten your ratings PIN.

You want to cancel the ratings level.

¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc

tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive,

then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] on the main unit at the

same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the

unit’s display).

Quick View does not work.

¾ This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.

¾ This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.

Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.

¾ These functions do not work with finalised discs.

¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings

are different from the title recorded on the disc. (> 69)

The resume play function does not work.

¾ Memorized position on the disc is cancelled when

– press [∫] several times.

– open the disc tray.

– [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit.

– if a recording or timer recording was executed.

The Video CD picture does not display properly.

¾ When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV

System” in the Setup menu. (> 69)

¾ When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture

cannot be displayed correctly during search.

Cannot see the beginning of the title played.

¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI

cable)

When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you

may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the

picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the

beginning of the title.

¾ The resume play function is activated.

Press [OPTION] while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is

displayed and press [3, 4] to select “Play from beginning” and

then press [OK].

Available disc space does not increase even after

deleting a title.

¾ Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-

R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL. (> 21)

¾ Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is

deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW. The disc

space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.

Cannot edit.

¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available

space.

Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 21, 43,

62)

¾ If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry

screen may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your

4-digit PIN and press [OK].

Cannot format.

¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

(> 15)

¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in

this unit. (> 12–13)

Cannot create chapters.

Cannot mark the start point or the end point

during “Partial Delete” operation.

¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when

you turn it off or remove the disc. The information is not written

if there is an interruption to the power before this.

¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.

¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You

cannot set an end point before a start point.

Cannot delete chapters.

¾ When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine

Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 43)

Cannot create a Playlist (Video).

¾ You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title

also includes still pictures. Select them individually.

Play

Edit

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 81 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Troubleshooting guide

Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.

¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS

restrictions, they will not be copied.

¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA

specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.

ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not completely displayed.

¾ Only the track name ([HDD] [USB]) and artist name ([HDD]) can

be displayed with this unit.

Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or

while the unit is standing by for linked timer recording with

external equipment.

Copying, deleting and setting protection takes a

long time.

¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take

a few hours.

¾ When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a

long time. Format the disc. (> 62)

Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.

¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as

PROGRESSIVE JPEG etc., may not playback. (> 14)

The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.

¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert

again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the

unit again.

¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 15)

¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not

compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory

may be damaged.) (> 14)

¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file

extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 14)

¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again.

¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a

USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.

¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 14)

¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB

memory may not be recognized by this unit.

The TV Guide System does not receive any data.

¾ This unit can only display either the TV Guide for the digital

broadcasts or for the analogue broadcasts. Default setting is TV

Guide for the digital broadcasts. To display the TV Guide for the

analogue broadcasts, change “TV Guide Type” in Setup menu.

(> 71)

¾ [Analogue] The GUIDE Plus+ system data is updated several

times each day. When the unit is first connected, the GUIDE

Plus+ system is not yet ready to receive data.

It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download.

Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take

approximately one day before you can display the television

programme list. (> 10, 31)

¾ [DVB-T] [Analogue] In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is

available, check whether correct post code is entered. (> 31,

71)

¾ Check whether TV Guide system setup was performed in full.

¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 70)

¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the

TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.

¾ Natural disasters, system trouble or other such factors may

make it impossible for TV GUIDE to be used. Panasonic shall in

no way be liable for any damages or losses related to the use of

TV GUIDE.

“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.

¾ [Analogue] These stations may not have been able to be

identified automatically.

For these stations, select the “On” in the sub menu under

“Editor” and assign the correct reference station manually.

(> 31)

¾ Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.

¾ Programme the Timer recording manually or via S

HOWVIEW.

(> 27, 30)

The TV Guide information is not displayed

properly.

¾ [Analogue] The reference station is not assigned correctly in

“Editor”.

Select the correct reference station. (> 31)

¾ [Analogue] Programme information about analogue broadcasts

is not displayed when you set “TV Guide Type” to “Digital

Channels”.

To use the TV Guide for the analogue broadcasts, change “TV

Guide Type”. (> 71)

¾ There was a programme change.

Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV

Guide system provider or station provider.

The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.

¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to

the interruption.

¾ The programme information may be incomplete.

The TV Guide data is not updated.

¾ The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If

the unit is in EXT LINK mode (EXT-L lights up in the display),

then the data update may also not work.

¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly.

¾ [DVB-T] [Analogue] Make sure that “TV Guide Download in

Standby” or “Night Download” is set to “On”. (> 31, 71)

Music

Still pictures

USB

TV Guide

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 82 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Reference

[DVB-T] Digital broadcasts cannot be received.

¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.

¾ The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station,

or the direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong

winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV

aerial installer.

¾ Switch “Active Antenna” to “On” in the Setup menu if you are

using an indoor antenna. (> 70)

[DVB-T] After DVB Auto Setup only some or no

DVB channels are found.

¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.

¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.

If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a

combined VHF/UHF aerial should be adequate. Outside this

area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception

performance. (> 6)

Picture regularly breaks up on some channels.

“No Signal” message is displayed.

¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household

appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause

picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality

quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and

antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If

problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer or CATV

provider.

¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the

Setup menu. (> 65)

¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength”

are displayed in red or constantly changing, check the aerial or

the connection. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial

installer or CATV provider. (> 65)

¾ Check that the aerial or connecting cable is designed for DVB.

¾ Check the connection.

[DVB-T] Picture very infrequently breaks up on

some or all channels.

¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant

lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may

cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort

momentarily.

¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical

appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy”

ignition system.

[DVB-C] Even after scanning channels with “Full

Scan” in DVB Auto Setup, some channels are not

found or no channels are found.

¾ Check the connections. (> 6, 73)

¾ You can specify optional symbol rates for scanning channels as

follows:

1 Restart auto channel setting. (> 64, Auto Setup Restart)

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital Cable (DVB-C) & Analogue

Channels” or “Digital Cable (DVB-C) Channels” and press

[OK].

3 Press [OPTION] in “DVB Auto Setup” screen.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “---- ksym/s (User Def.)” and enter

the symbol rate with numbered buttons and then press [OK].

5 Press [OK].

Then go to step 5 on page 8 and complete the settings.

Refer to your CATV provider about the symbol rate

information.

VIERA Link doesn’t work.

¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is

displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit

is set to On.

¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 69)

¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.

¾ Some functions may not work if depending on the version of

“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports

“HDAVI Control 5” functions.

¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was

changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was

removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”

may not work.

In this case, perform the following operations.

1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the

power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.

2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”

function to off, and then set to on again. (For more

information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)

3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,

and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI

Control” is working.

The operation on this unit (music playback etc.)

is interrupted.

¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press

buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA

Link functions.

To return all the settings other than the main ones

to the factory preset

¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the

settings except for language settings, Slideshow Settings, clock

settings, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and

“Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory preset.

The timer recording programmes are also cancelled. (> 71)

¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the

settings except for tuning settings, clock settings, language

settings, disc language settings, remote control code, ratings

levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in

Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory presets. The timer

recording programmes are also cancelled. (> 71)

¾ Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the

Language setting screen appears. All the settings except for

clock settings, remote control code, ratings levels and PINs

(“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc.

return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes

are also cancelled.

To reset the ratings level settings

¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select

the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] on the

main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the

safety devices being activated

¾ Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 3 seconds. (The

settings remain.)

After performing an update, you can no longer

receive broadcasts.

¾ Depending on the content of the update, some settings may

have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.

Digital broadcast

VIERA Link

To reset this unit

Other

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 83 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Specifications

Recording system DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R : DVD-Video format

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format

DVD-RW : DVD-Video format

+R DL (Double Layer)

+RW

Recordable discs

DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)

DVD-R: 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)

DVD-RW: 1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

+R: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)

+R DL: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)

+RW: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

Recording time Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)

XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours

LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours

Maximum Approx. 567 hours with 320 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)

XP: Approx. 71 hours, SP: Approx. 142 hours

LP: Approx. 284 hours, EP: Approx. 426 hours/567 hours

Playable discs

DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format, JPEG

DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3

§1

, JPEG

§1

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format,

MP3

§1

, JPEG

§1

DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format

+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW

DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD, SVCD

§2

CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA

§1

, Video CD

§1

, SVCD

§1§2

, MP3

§1

JPEG

Internal HDD capacity 320 GB

Optical pick-up System with 1 lens, 2 integration units

(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)

LASER specification

Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)

Wave length:

Laser power:

No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection

Audio

Recording system: Dolby Digital 2ch (XP, SP LP, EP mode),

Linear PCM (XP mode)

Audio in: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)

Input level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz

Input impedance: More than 10 k≠

Audio out: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)

Output level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz

Output impedance: Less than 1 k≠

Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

HDMI Output 19 pin type A: 1 pc

≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.

Video

Video system:

SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal

NTSC colour signal

Recording system: MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)

Video in (PAL/SECAM/NTSC): AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack),

1 Vp-p 75 ≠

S-Video in (PAL/SECAM/NTSC): AV2 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 ≠

Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack), 1 Vp-p 75 ≠

S-Video out (PAL/NTSC): AV1 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 ≠

RGB out (PAL/NTSC): AV1 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠

Television system

RF converter output: Not provided

Active Antenna output: 5 V switched, 50 mA max,

over current protected.

USB port Type A : 1 pc

USB standard: USB 2.0 High Speed

Format: FAT16, FAT32

Video (SD Video)

§3

Codec: MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)

File Format: SD-Video format conforming

Common Interface (CI) Slot

EN 50221 Standard, 1 slot, Type I and II PC Card (5 V only),

rear side

Others

Region code:

‚ 2

Operating temperature: 5 oC to 40 oC

Operating humidity range: 10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)

Power supply: AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

Power consumption: Approx. 30 W

Dimensions (WkHkD): 430 mmk59 mmk286 mm

Mass: Approx. 3.4 kg

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

§1

Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.

§2

Conforming to IEC62107

This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji Video CD” available on the market

including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107.

§3

Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from

Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or

DVD-RAM disc.

After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-

RAM disc, the playback is possible.

CD 780 nm wave length

DVD 662 nm wave length

Tuner system Channel coverage

PAL-B,G,H

(CCIR)

VHF: E2–E12

UHF: 21–69

CATV: S01–S05 (S1–S3),

S1–S20 (M1–U10), S21–S41

DVB-T/C VHF: 5–12

UHF: 21–69

CATV: S1–S20 (M1–U10) 7 MHz Band,

D051 - D073, D113 - D858

Power consumption in standby mode:

Approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save in Standby” is activated and

“RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)

Approx. 13 W (“Power Save in Standby” is not activated.)

Note

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 84 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Reference

Glossary

Bitstream

This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)

before it is decoded into its various channels.

CI (Common Interface)

Common Interface is a defined standard, to enable the addition of a

CAM (Conditional Access Module) in a Digital TV/Recorder.

CI Plus

CI Plus is a technical specification that adds additional security and

features to the proven DVB Common Interface Standard that will

allow CI Plus compatible consumer electronics devices, such as

Integrated Digital Televisions and Set Top Boxes, access to a wide

range of Pay TV Services via a Plug-in CI Plus CAM wherever the CI

Plus Technology is supported by the local Pay TV Provider.

CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)

CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to

be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with

CPRM compatible recorders and discs.

Decoder

A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This

is called decoding.

Deep Colour

This unit incorporates HDMI

Deep Colour technology that can

reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when connected to

a compatible TV. You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking

colours, with smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour

banding. [A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour,

will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support

Deep Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to

suit the connected TV.]

Dolby Digital

This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby

Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can

also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information

can be recorded on one disc using this method.

When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default

audio.

Down-mixing

This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on

some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to

the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s

speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then

only output the front two channels.

Drive

In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD) and disc

(DVD). These perform the reading and writing of data.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good

separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are

possible.

Dynamic range

Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound

that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest

level of sound before distortion occurs.

Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the

loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low

volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.

Film and video

DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can

determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable

method of progressive output.

Finalise

A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,

etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can

finalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R

DL on this unit.

After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer

record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for

recording again.

Folder

This is a place on the hard disk or disc where groups of data are

stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where

still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.

Formatting

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM

recordable on recording equipment.

You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),

+RW and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.

Formatting permanently deletes all contents.

Frames and fields

Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see

on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.

≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but

picture quality is generally better.

≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but

there is no blurring.

H.264

This is a method of video compression and is equivalent to MPEG-4

AVC. It has a broad application range that covers all forms of digital

compressed video from low bit-rate Internet streaming applications

to HD broadcasts.

HDD (Hard disk drive)

This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk

with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and

a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading

and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital

video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-

definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]

from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high

definition compatible television is required.

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.

If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,

the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The

benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering

the degree of compression.

LPCM (Linear PCM)

These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on

CDs.

MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)

A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.

MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based

digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.

SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be

copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)

An audio compression method that compresses audio to

approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of

audio quality.

Pan&Scan/Letterbox

In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be

viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images

often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of

picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.

Playback control (PBC)

If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and

information with menus.

(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)

Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24

frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs

recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)

Generally appropriate for motion picture films.

Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second (PAL discs)

or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).

Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or

animation.

Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture

fills the screen.

Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and

bottom of the picture so the picture

itself appears in an aspect ratio of

16:9.

Frame Field Field

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 85 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Glossary

Protection

You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or

deletion protection.

RGB

This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),

and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.

By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,

noise is reduced for even higher quality images.

Sampling frequency

Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave

(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital

encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per

second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the

original sound.

Signal Quality

This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered

values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the

quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels

you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time

(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,

etc.

Thumbnail

This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display

multiple pictures in the form of a list.

1080i

In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass

every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because

1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of

480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic

and rich image.

1080p

In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the

same time every 1/50

of a second to create a progressive image.

Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,

there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

720p

In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same

time every 1/50

of a second to create a progressive image. Since

progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there

is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic

products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection

points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential

negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your

waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.

For business users in the European Union

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities

or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the

Directive for the chemical involved.

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 86 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

VQT4W64

Reference

http://www.rovicorp.com

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674;

5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents

issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol

together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+Digital Out is a

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is

protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights

of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are

prohibited.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface

are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing

LLC in the United States and other countries.

HDAVI Control

is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

The recording and playback of content on this or any other

device may require permission from the owner of the copyright

or other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority

to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly

disclaims any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission

on your behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of

this or any other device complies with applicable copyright

legislation in your country. Please refer to that legislation for

more information on the relevant laws and regulations involved

or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to

record or playback.

GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or

trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3)

subject of various international patents and patent applications

owned by, or licensed to, Rovi Corporation and/or its related

affiliates.

ROVI CORPORATION AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES

ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF

THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY

THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL ROVI

CORPORATION AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE

LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF

PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH

THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION,

EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE

PLUS+ SYSTEM.

The “CI Plus” Logo is a trademark of CI Plus LLP.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

“DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing

Corporation.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL

Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.

(http://www.openssl.org/

)

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 87 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

Index

Active Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 70

Adjust the audio quality

(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Adjust the picture quality

(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Album (Music)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Album (Still picture)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Audio

Digital broadcast

(DVB Multi Audio) . . . . . . 17, 19, 60, 66

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Auto Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Channel

Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66

Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 42

Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 67

Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

CI Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 72, 85

Cleaning

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 70

Connection

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 73

Amplifier, receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74

Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Digital satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 7, 73, 74

Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Copy

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Title/Playlist (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49

CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 43

Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 48

Delete

Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 45

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 49

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 68, 69

Digital broadcast

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 17

DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . 17, 19, 60, 66

DVB Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 19, 61, 66

New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 65

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . 34, 37, 42, 46

Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–13

Display

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 17

Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

DVB Multi Audio

Record with selected audio . . . . . . . . . 19

Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 60

DVB Subtitle

Record with subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Select subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 61

Show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Edit

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Enabling discs to be played on other

equipment - Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 85

Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 85

FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . 23, 24

FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . 5, 41, 68

GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 20, 31, 32

H.264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 39–40, 69

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 69, 85

High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 37–38, 85

Language

Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 67

Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 67

Linked timer recordings with external

equipment (digital satellite receiver)

—EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 70

LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 85

Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Mode

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 36

Music on HDD

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Name

Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 43

Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 65

On-screen

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 48

Power Save in Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Properties

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 46

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Protection

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 67

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 27–32

Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 60

sume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

HOWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 38, 49

Smart Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Still picture

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Subtitle

Digital broadcast

(DVB Subtitle) . . . . . . . . . 17, 19, 61, 66

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 67

Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc

(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Tuning

Analogue broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

List of TV Reception Channels . . . . . . . 75

TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 20, 28, 32

TV Guide Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

USB

Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57

Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 39–40, 69

Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.

Pursuant to the applicable EU legislation

Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://panasonic.net

VQT4W64

F0313TJ0

DMREX96C-VQTXXXX_eng.book 88 ページ２０１３年３月５日　火曜日　午後５時５１分

Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

First, read the manual;
Check if your question has been asked previously;
Try to ask your question as clearly as possible;
Did you already try to solve the problem? Please mention this;
Is your problem solved by a visitor then let him/her know in this forum;
To give a response to a question or answer, do not use this form but click on the button 'reply to this question';
Your question will be posted here and emailed to our subscribers. Therefore, avoid filling in personal details.

new questions and answers
new manuals

You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.

Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Panasonic DMREX96CEG in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 4,29 mb in size.

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Panasonic DMREX96CEG

Panasonic DMREX96CEG User Manual - German - 88 pages

Panasonic DMREX96CEG User Manual - French - 88 pages

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.

Info

Panasonic DMREX96CEG Manual

Product: